KR20230054205A - Method and appratus for activation or deactivation of cell group in a next generation mobile communication system - Google Patents

Abstract

The present invention relates to a communication technique that combines a 5G communication system with an IoT technology to support a higher data transmission rate after a 4G system and a system thereof. The present invention can be applied to intelligent services (eg, smart home, smart building, smart city, smart car or connected car, healthcare, digital education, retail business, security and safety related services, etc.) based on a 5G communication technology and an IoT-related technology. According to various embodiments of the present invention, provided are a method for quickly activating a cell in a next-generation mobile communication system and a device thereof.

Description

Method and apparatus for activating or deactivating a cell group in a next-generation mobile communication system

The present disclosure relates to the operation of a terminal and a base station in a mobile communication system. More specifically, the present disclosure relates to a method and apparatus capable of quickly activating a cell in a next-generation mobile communication system.

Efforts are being made to develop an improved 5G communication system or pre-5G communication system to meet the growing demand for wireless data traffic after the commercialization of the 4G communication system. For this reason, the 5G communication system or pre-5G communication system is being called a system after the 4G network (Beyond 4G Network) communication system or LTE system (Post LTE). In order to achieve a high data rate, the 5G communication system is being considered for implementation in a mmWave band (eg, a 60 gigabyte (60 GHz) band). In order to mitigate the path loss of radio waves and increase the propagation distance of radio waves in the ultra-high frequency band, beamforming, massive MIMO, and Full Dimensional MIMO (FD-MIMO) are used in 5G communication systems. ), array antenna, analog beam-forming, and large scale antenna technologies are being discussed. In addition, to improve the network of the system, in the 5G communication system, an evolved small cell, an advanced small cell, a cloud radio access network (cloud RAN), and an ultra-dense network , Device to Device communication (D2D), wireless backhaul, moving network, cooperative communication, Coordinated Multi-Points (CoMP), and interference cancellation etc. are being developed. In addition, in the 5G system, advanced coding modulation (Advanced Coding Modulation: ACM) methods FQAM (Hybrid FSK and QAM Modulation) and SWSC (Sliding Window Superposition Coding), advanced access technologies FBMC (Filter Bank Multi Carrier), NOMA (non orthogonal multiple access), SCMA (sparse code multiple access), etc. are being developed.

On the other hand, the Internet is evolving from a human-centered connection network in which humans create and consume information to an Internet of Things (IoT) network in which information is exchanged and processed between distributed components such as things. IoE (Internet of Everything) technology, which combines IoT technology with big data processing technology through connection with cloud servers, etc., is also emerging. In order to implement IoT, technical elements such as sensing technology, wired/wireless communication and network infrastructure, service interface technology, and security technology are required, and recently, sensor networks for connection between objects and machine to machine , M2M), and MTC (Machine Type Communication) technologies are being studied. In the IoT environment, intelligent IT (Internet Technology) services that create new values in human life by collecting and analyzing data generated from connected objects can be provided. IoT is a field of smart home, smart building, smart city, smart car or connected car, smart grid, health care, smart home appliances, advanced medical service, etc. can be applied to

Accordingly, various attempts are being made to apply the 5G communication system to the IoT network. For example, technologies such as sensor network, machine to machine (M2M), and machine type communication (MTC) are implemented by techniques such as beamforming, MIMO, and array antenna, and 5G communication technologies There is. The application of the cloud radio access network (cloud RAN) as the big data processing technology described above can be said to be an example of convergence of 5G technology and IoT technology.

Meanwhile, the need for a method for utilizing carrier aggregation (CA) or dual connectivity (DC) has emerged in a next-generation mobile communication system.

In a next-generation mobile communication system, carrier aggregation (CA) or dual connectivity (DC) may be used to provide a service with a high data rate and low transmission delay to a terminal. However, a method for preventing processing delay that may occur when configuring and activating carrier aggregation technology or dual access technology in a terminal connected to a network or when inactivating carrier aggregation technology or dual access technology after using it is required. Specifically, if the terminal maintains a plurality of cells in an active state to use the carrier aggregation technology or the dual access technology, battery consumption of the terminal may increase because the terminal must perform PDCCH monitoring for each cell. On the other hand, if the plurality of cells are kept in an inactive state in order to reduce battery consumption of the terminal, data transmission/reception delay may occur due to a delay occurring when activating the plurality of cells when using carrier aggregation technology or dual access technology. there is. Therefore, it is necessary to devise a method capable of solving this problem.

Meanwhile, in the present disclosure, a cell is a PCell (primary cell) or SCell (secondary cell) (eg, a SCell configured in a master cell group (MCG, Master Cell Group)) or a PSCell (eg, a secondary cell group ( A PCell of a Secondary Cell Group (SCG) or a SCell (eg, a SCell configured in a Secondary Cell Group (SCG)) may be indicated.

The present disclosure for solving the above problems is a control signal processing method in a wireless communication system, comprising: receiving a first control signal transmitted from a base station; processing the received first control signal; and transmitting a second control signal generated based on the processing to the base station.

In the present disclosure, in a next-generation mobile communication system, a new dormant or suspension mode (dormant mode or suspension mode) or inactivation mode so that an RRC connection mode terminal that has established a connection with a network can quickly activate and deactivate carrier aggregation technology or dual access technology. suggests In addition, in the present disclosure, a new hibernation or dormancy or suspension mode can be operated in a bandwidth part-level or in a cell or in a cell group (for example, for a secondary cell group) By proposing a method, carrier aggregation technology or dual access technology can be quickly activated, and the battery of the terminal can be saved. In addition, when the base station instructs the terminal to activate a cell (PCell, PSCell, or SCell), the terminal temporarily sets, allocates, or sends many transmission resources capable of performing channel measurement, and the terminal The channel measurement result can be quickly reported to the base station so that the cell can be quickly activated.

Effects obtainable in the present disclosure are not limited to the effects mentioned above, and other effects not mentioned may be clearly understood by those skilled in the art from the description below. will be.

The above and other objects, features and advantages of the present disclosure will become more apparent through the following description of embodiments of the present disclosure with reference to the accompanying drawings.
1A is a diagram illustrating the structure of a long term evolution (LTE) system to which the present disclosure may be applied.
1B is a diagram illustrating a radio protocol structure in an LTE system to which the present disclosure can be applied.
1C is a diagram showing the structure of a next-generation mobile communication system to which the present disclosure can be applied.
1D is a diagram illustrating a radio protocol structure of a next-generation mobile communication system to which the present disclosure can be applied.
1e is a diagram illustrating a procedure for providing a service to a terminal by efficiently using a very wide frequency bandwidth in a next-generation mobile communication system to which the present disclosure can be applied.
1f shows a procedure for a terminal to switch from an RRC idle mode to an RRC connected mode in a next-generation mobile communication system to which the present disclosure can be applied, bearer configuration information for connection to the terminal, or cell group or It is a diagram illustrating a procedure for setting cell configuration information or channel measurement configuration information.
1G is a diagram illustrating a state transition or partial bandwidth switching procedure for each partial bandwidth proposed in the present disclosure.
1H is a diagram illustrating a discontinuous reception (DRX) setting or DRX operation method that can save a battery of a terminal proposed in the present disclosure.
1i is a diagram illustrating a method of managing an idle partial bandwidth in an activated SCell or PSCell proposed in the present disclosure.
1j is a diagram illustrating an embodiment in which the embodiments proposed in the present disclosure are extended and applied to an RRC inactive mode terminal.
1K is a first signaling procedure for setting up or releasing dual access technology, or activating or resuming, stopping or inactivating a secondary cell group configured with dual access technology in a next-generation mobile communication system to which the present disclosure can be applied. is a drawing showing
FIG. 1L is a second method for establishing or releasing dual access technology, or setting or releasing, activating, resuming, stopping, or inactivating a secondary cell group configured with dual access technology in a next-generation mobile communication system to which the present disclosure may be applied. It is a diagram showing the signaling procedure of
FIG. 1M is a third step for setting or releasing a dual access technology, or setting or releasing, activating, resuming, stopping, or inactivating a secondary cell group configured with the dual access technology in a next-generation mobile communication system to which the present disclosure may be applied. It is a diagram showing the signaling procedure of
1n is a diagram illustrating an operation of a terminal proposed in the present disclosure.
1O is a diagram illustrating the structure of a terminal to which an embodiment of the present disclosure can be applied.
1p is a diagram illustrating the structure of a base station (or transmission and reception point (TRP)) to which an embodiment of the present disclosure may be applied.

Hereinafter, the operating principle of the present disclosure will be described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings. In the following description of the present disclosure, if it is determined that a detailed description of a related known function or configuration may unnecessarily obscure the subject matter of the present disclosure, the detailed description will be omitted. In addition, terms to be described later are terms defined in consideration of functions in the present disclosure, which may vary according to intentions or customs of users or operators. Therefore, the definition should be made based on the contents throughout this specification.

In the following description of the present disclosure, if it is determined that a detailed description of a related known function or configuration may unnecessarily obscure the gist of the present disclosure, the detailed description will be omitted. Hereinafter, embodiments of the present disclosure will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings.

A term used in the following description to identify a connection node, a term referring to network entities, a term referring to messages, a term referring to an interface between network entities, and a term referring to various types of identification information. Etc. are illustrated for convenience of description. Accordingly, the present disclosure is not limited to the terms described below, and other terms referring to objects having equivalent technical meanings may be used.

For convenience of description below, terms and names defined in the 3rd Generation Partnership Project Long Term Evolution (3GPP LTE) standard are used in the present disclosure. However, the present disclosure is not limited by the above terms and names, and may be equally applied to systems conforming to other standards.

In the present disclosure, eNB may be used interchangeably with gNB for convenience of description. That is, a base station described as an eNB may indicate a gNB.

In addition, in the present disclosure, each layer of the radio protocol structure (eg, service data adaptation protocol (SDAP), packet data convergence protocol (PDCP), radio link control (RLC), medium access control (MAC), physical ) may be referred to as a layer device, entity. For example, in this disclosure, a MAC layer may also be referred to as a MAC layer device or a MAC entity.

Figure 1a is a diagram showing the structure of an LTE system to which the present disclosure can be applied.

Referring to FIG. 1A, the radio access network of the LTE system includes a next-generation base station (Evolved Node B, hereinafter ENB, Node B or base station) (1a-05, 1a-10, 1a-15, 1a-20) and an MME (1a- 25, Mobility Management Entity) and S-GW (1a-30, Serving-Gateway). A user equipment (UE or terminal) 1a-35 accesses an external network through ENBs 1a-05 to 1a-20 and S-GW 1a-30.

In FIG. 1A, ENBs 1a-05 to 1a-20 correspond to existing Node Bs of the UMTS system. The ENB is connected to the UE (1a-35) through a radio channel and performs a more complex role than the existing Node B. In the LTE system, since all user traffic, including real-time services such as VoIP (Voice over IP) through the Internet protocol, is serviced through a shared channel, status information such as buffer status, available transmission power status, and channel status of UEs A device that collects and performs scheduling is required, and ENBs (1a-05 to 1a-20) are in charge of this. One ENB usually controls multiple cells. For example, in order to implement a transmission rate of 100 Mbps, the LTE system uses orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (hereinafter referred to as OFDM) as a radio access technology in a 20 MHz bandwidth, for example. In addition, an adaptive modulation & voding (hereinafter referred to as AMC) method for determining a modulation scheme and a channel coding rate according to the channel condition of the terminal is applied. The S-GW (1a-30) is a device that provides a data bearer, and creates or removes a data bearer under the control of the MME (1a-25). The MME is a device in charge of various control functions as well as a mobility management function for a terminal, and is connected to a plurality of base stations.

1B is a diagram illustrating a radio protocol structure in an LTE system to which the present disclosure can be applied.

Referring to FIG. 1B, the radio protocols of the LTE system are PDCP (packet data convergence protocol 1b-05, 1b-40), RLC (radio link control 1b-10, 1b-35), MAC (medium access) in the UE and ENB, respectively. control 1b-15, 1b-30). PDCP (packet data convergence protocol) (1b-05, 1b-40) is in charge of operations such as IP header compression/restoration. The main functions of PDCP are summarized as follows.

- Header compression and decompression (ROHC only)

- Transfer of user data

- In-sequence delivery of upper layer PDUs at PDCP re-establishment procedure for RLC AM

- Order reordering function (For split bearers in DC (only support for RLC AM): PDCP PDU routing for transmission and PDCP PDU reordering for reception)

- Duplicate detection of lower layer SDUs at PDCP re-establishment procedure for RLC AM

- Retransmission of PDCP SDUs at handover and, for split bearers in DC, of PDCP PDUs at PDCP data-recovery procedure, for RLC AM)

- Ciphering and deciphering

- Timer-based SDU discard in uplink.

Radio link control (hereinafter referred to as RLC) (1b-10, 1b-35) reconfigures a PDCP protocol data unit (PDU) or RLC service data unit (SDU) into an appropriate size to perform an ARQ operation, etc. . The main functions of RLC are summarized as follows.

- Transfer of upper layer PDUs

- ARQ function (Error Correction through ARQ (only for AM data transfer))

- Concatenation, segmentation and reassembly of RLC SDUs (only for UM and AM data transfer)

- Re-segmentation of RLC data PDUs (only for AM data transfer)

- Reordering of RLC data PDUs (only for UM and AM data transfer)

- Duplicate detection (only for UM and AM data transfer)

- Error detection function (Protocol error detection (only for AM data transfer))

- RLC SDU discard function (RLC SDU discard (only for UM and AM data transfer))

- RLC re-establishment

MACs (1b-15, 1b-30) are connected to several RLC layer devices (or RLC layer, RLC entities) configured in one terminal, and multiplex RLC PDUs to MAC PDUs and demultiplex RLC PDUs from MAC PDUs. perform the action The main functions of MAC are summarized as follows.

- Mapping between logical channels and transport channels

- Multiplexing/demultiplexing of MAC SDUs belonging to one or different logical channels into/from transport blocks (TB) delivered to/from the physical layer on transport channels)

- Scheduling information reporting

- HARQ function (Error correction through HARQ)

- Priority handling between logical channels of one UE

- Priority handling between UEs by means of dynamic scheduling

- MBMS service identification

- Transport format selection

- Padding function (Padding)

The physical layer (1b-20, 1b-25) channel-codes and modulates higher-layer data, converts it into OFDM symbols and transmits it through a radio channel, or demodulates and channel-decodes OFDM symbols received through a radio channel and transmits them to the upper layer do the action

1C is a diagram showing the structure of a next-generation mobile communication system to which the present disclosure can be applied.

Referring to FIG. 1c, the radio access network of the next-generation mobile communication system (hereinafter NR or 5G) includes a next-generation base station (New Radio Node B, hereinafter NR gNB or NR base station) 1c-10 and NR CN (1c-05, New Radio Core Network). A user terminal (New Radio User Equipment, hereinafter referred to as NR UE or terminal) 1c-15 accesses an external network through the NR gNB 1c-10 and the NR CN 1c-05.

In FIG. 1c, the NR gNB 1c-10 corresponds to an evolved Node B (eNB) of the existing LTE system. The NR gNB is connected to the NR UE (1c-15) through a radio channel and can provide superior service than the existing Node B. In the next-generation mobile communication system, since all user traffic is serviced through a shared channel, a device that performs scheduling by collecting status information such as buffer status, available transmit power status, and channel status of UEs is required, which is called NR NB (1c-10) is in charge. One NR gNB usually controls multiple cells. In order to implement high-speed data transmission compared to the current LTE, it may have more than the existing maximum bandwidth, and additional beamforming technology may be applied using orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (hereinafter referred to as OFDM) as a radio access technology. . In addition, an adaptive modulation & coding (AMC) method for determining a modulation scheme and a channel coding rate according to the channel condition of the terminal is applied. The NR CN (1c-05) performs functions such as mobility support, bearer setup, and QoS setup. The NR CN is a device in charge of various control functions as well as mobility management functions for a terminal, and is connected to a plurality of base stations. In addition, the next-generation mobile communication system can be interworked with the existing LTE system, and the NR CN is connected to the MME (1c-25) through a network interface. The MME is connected to the eNB (1c-30), which is an existing base station.

1D is a diagram illustrating a radio protocol structure of a next-generation mobile communication system to which the present disclosure can be applied.

Referring to FIG. 1D, the radio protocols of the next-generation mobile communication system are NR SDAP (service data adaptation protocol) (1d-01, 1d-45), NR PDCP (1d-05, 1d-40), It consists of NR RLC (1d-10, 1d-35) and NR MAC (1d-15, 1d-30).

The main functions of the NR SDAPs (1d-01, 1d-45) may include some of the following functions.

Transfer of user plane data

A mapping function between a QoS flow and a data bearer for uplink and downlink (mapping between a QoS flow and a DRB for both DL and UL)

Marking QoS flow ID for uplink and downlink (marking QoS flow ID in both DL and UL packets)

A function of mapping a relective QoS flow to a data bearer for uplink SDAP PDUs (reflective QoS flow to DRB mapping for the UL SDAP PDUs).

Regarding the SDAP layer device, the terminal may receive a RRC message to set whether to use the header of the SDAP layer device or the function of the SDAP layer device for each PDCP layer device, each bearer, or each logical channel, and SDAP header is set, the NAS QoS reflection setting 1-bit indicator (NAS reflective QoS) and the AS QoS reflection setting 1-bit indicator (AS reflective QoS) in the SDAP header allow the terminal to provide uplink and downlink QoS flows and mapping information for data bearers can be instructed to update or reset. The SDAP header may include QoS flow ID information indicating QoS. The QoS information may be used as data processing priority and scheduling information to support smooth service.

The main functions of the NR PDCPs (1d-05, 1d-40) may include some of the following functions.

Header compression and decompression (ROHC only)

- Transfer of user data

- In-order delivery of upper layer PDUs

- Out-of-order delivery of upper layer PDUs

- PDCP PDU reordering for reception

- Duplicate detection of lower layer SDUs

- Retransmission of PDCP SDUs

- Encryption or deciphering function (Ciphering and deciphering)

- Integrity protection and verification

- Timer-based SDU discard in uplink.

In the above, the reordering function of the NR PDCP device refers to a function of rearranging PDCP PDUs received from a lower layer in order based on a PDCP SN (sequence number), and a function of transmitting data to an upper layer in the rearranged order Alternatively, it may include a function of immediately forwarding without considering the order, and may include a function of rearranging the order to record lost PDCP PDUs, and reporting the status of lost PDCP PDUs. to the transmitting side, and may include a function of requesting retransmission of lost PDCP PDUs.

The main functions of NR RLC (1d-10, 1d-35) may include some of the following functions.

- Transfer of upper layer PDUs

- In-order delivery of upper layer PDUs

- Out-of-order delivery of upper layer PDUs

- ARQ function (Error Correction through ARQ)

- Concatenation, segmentation and reassembly of RLC SDUs

- Re-segmentation of RLC data PDUs

- Reordering of RLC data PDUs

- Duplicate detection

- Error detection function (Protocol error detection)

- RLC SDU discard function (RLC SDU discard)

- RLC re-establishment

In the above, the in-order delivery function of the NR RLC device refers to a function of sequentially delivering RLC SDUs received from a lower layer to an upper layer. Originally, one RLC SDU is divided into several RLC SDUs and received , it may include a function of reassembling and forwarding the received RLC PDUs, and may include a function of rearranging the received RLC PDUs based on RLC SN (sequence number) or PDCP SN (sequence number). It may include a function of recording lost RLC PDUs, a function of reporting the status of lost RLC PDUs to the transmitting side, and a function of requesting retransmission of lost RLC PDUs. and, if there is a lost RLC SDU, may include a function of delivering only RLC SDUs prior to the lost RLC SDU to the upper layer in order, or if a predetermined timer expires even if there is a lost RLC SDU, a timer may be included. may include a function of forwarding all received RLC SDUs to the upper layer in order before the start of the RLC SDU, or if a predetermined timer expires even if there is a lost RLC SDU, all RLC SDUs received so far are sequentially transmitted to the upper layer It may include a forwarding function. In addition, RLC PDUs may be processed in the order in which they are received (regardless of the order of serial numbers and sequence numbers, in the order of arrival) and delivered to the PDCP device regardless of order (out-of-order delivery). In , segments stored in a buffer or to be received later may be received, reconstructed into one complete RLC PDU, processed, and transmitted to the PDCP device. The NR RLC layer may not include a concatenation function, and the function may be performed in the NR MAC layer or replaced with a multiplexing function of the NR MAC layer. In the above, whether to perform in-order delivery or out-of-order delivery may be set by an RRC message.

In the above, the out-of-sequence delivery function of the NR RLC device refers to a function of immediately delivering RLC SDUs received from a lower layer to an upper layer regardless of the order, and originally one RLC SDU is multiple RLC When received divided into SDUs, it may include a function of reassembling and forwarding them, and may include a function of storing RLC SNs or PDCP SNs of received RLC PDUs and arranging them in order to record lost RLC PDUs. can

NR MACs (1d-15, 1d-30) may be connected to several NR RLC layer devices configured in one terminal, and the main functions of the NR MAC may include some of the following functions.

- Mapping between logical channels and transport channels

- Multiplexing/demultiplexing of MAC SDUs

- Scheduling information reporting

- HARQ function (Error correction through HARQ)

- Priority handling between logical channels of one UE

- Priority handling between UEs by means of dynamic scheduling

- MBMS service identification

- Transport format selection

- Padding function (Padding)

The NR PHY layers (1d-20, 1d-25) channel code and modulate higher layer data, convert OFDM symbols into OFDM symbols and transmit them through a radio channel, or demodulate OFDM symbols received through a radio channel and channel decode them to a higher layer. You can perform forwarding operations.

Meanwhile, since a frequency of a very high band can be used in a next-generation mobile communication system, a frequency bandwidth may also be very wide. However, in terms of terminal implementation, supporting all very wide bandwidths requires high implementation complexity and incurs high costs. Therefore, in the next-generation mobile communication system, the concept of partial bandwidth (BWP) can be introduced, and a plurality of partial bandwidths (BWPs) are set in one cell (Spcell or Scell) and one or more Data can be transmitted and received in partial bandwidth.

In the present disclosure, when introducing the dormant partial bandwidth proposed in the present disclosure, a state transition method or partial bandwidth switching method considering the state of the Scell and a plurality of partial bandwidths set in the Scell and a specific operation are proposed. In addition, a method of managing the dormant mode in a partial bandwidth unit (BWP-level) and a method of state transition or a partial bandwidth switching method is proposed, respectively, and the state of each SCell or the state or mode (activation or inactivation or dormancy) of each partial bandwidth We propose a specific partial bandwidth operation according to. In addition, in order to quickly activate a cell (SCell) or partial bandwidth, the first channel measurement configuration information for the cell or partial bandwidth is set as an RRC message or MAC CE, and the terminal sets the first channel measurement configuration By instructing the information to be applied and used (activated), the terminal can quickly measure a channel signal (eg, reference signal) for the cell or partial bandwidth and quickly report the measurement result to the base station, A cell or partial bandwidth can be quickly activated. Activating the cell or partial bandwidth in the above means that the UE monitors a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) in the cell or partial bandwidth, or the base station transmits the PDCCH to the UE, or the base station transmits downlink data (PDSCH (PDSCH) to the UE). physical downlink shared channel)), or the UE transmits uplink data (physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH)), or the UE transmits a measurement result or a hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) through a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) ACK (acknowledgement) or NACK (negative-ACK) is transmitted, or the terminal transmits a sounding reference signal (SRS), or the terminal transmits a channel measurement signal transmitted by the base station (synchronization signal block (SSB) or CSI-RS It may refer to procedures for measuring a (channel state information reference signal) or a reference signal (RS), or for a terminal to measure a signal for channel measurement transmitted by a base station and to report the result. In the above, the first channel measurement configuration information may include configuration information for a channel measurement signal for a specific terminal (or terminals) in the cell or partial bandwidth of the base station. For example, the period of the signal for measuring the channel or the number of signals transmitted, the period during which the signal is transmitted or the offset for the time during which the signal is transmitted or the length of time between signals to be transmitted or a plurality of channels that can be transmitted A list of signals or a time transmission resource (or frequency transmission resource) indicating the position of a signal to be transmitted, or a transmission resource (time transmission resource or frequency transmission resource) for reporting measurement results, or a period for reporting measurement results, etc. can include In addition, the first channel measurement configuration information set as the RRC message may include a plurality of signal information for channel measurement, and any one of the plurality of channel measurement signal information set above as an RRC message or MAC CE or DCI One channel measurement signal information or beam configuration information is indicated, and the terminal performs channel measurement by applying the indicated channel measurement signal information or beam configuration information or by using the indicated channel measurement signal information or beam configuration information. It may be performed or a channel measurement report may be performed. In another method, by setting or instructing signal information for channel measurement with the RRC message or MAC CE, the terminal performs channel measurement by applying or using the set (or indicated) signal information for channel measurement, or You can make a measurement report. In addition, the first channel measurement configuration information may be set differently for each cell or for each partial bandwidth for a plurality of cells or partial bandwidths configured in the RRC message, and the terminal easily measures transmission resources for measuring a channel. To support this, beam-related setting information (transmission configuration indication (TCI) state or quasi co-location (QCL)) such as beam direction, beam number, or beam position may be set together. In addition, the first channel measurement setting information includes a timing advance (TA) value (or offset value) for synchronizing the downlink signal of the base station or the uplink signal of the base station, or a timer (TAT, Time Alignment Timer) or timer value (TAT value) can be set to correctly perform channel measurement or channel measurement report.

The first channel measurement setting information proposed in the present disclosure may be characterized in that only downlink partial bandwidth setting information of each cell can be set. That is, the first channel measurement configuration information proposed in the present disclosure may not be set for uplink partial bandwidth configuration information of each cell. This is because the UE must first measure the channel for the downlink so that it can correctly receive the PDCCH and follow the instructions to the base station after reporting the measurement result for the channel or cell.

The first channel measurement configuration information proposed in the present disclosure may be initially deactivated when configured as an RRC message or after handover, and later MAC control information or PDCCH DCI proposed in the present disclosure It can be activated by information or RRC message. When the RRC message is configured as described above, the base station can easily manage the cell state or the channel measurement procedure of the UE only when the initial state is inactive, and the UE can measure when and how the channel is measured without processing delay of the RRC message. The timing of what to do can also be done accurately.

In addition, in the present disclosure, a plurality of partial bandwidths are set for each downlink or uplink in one cell (Spcell or Pcell or Pscell or Scell), and active partial bandwidth (active DL or UL BWP) or dormant portion through partial bandwidth switching It is characterized in that a bandwidth (dormant BWP or dormant DL BWP) or inactive partial bandwidth (inactive or deactivated DL/UL BWP) can be set and operated. That is, the downlink or uplink partial bandwidth for the one cell can be transitioned to an active state to increase the data transmission rate in a manner similar to the carrier aggregation technology, and the downlink partial bandwidth can be transitioned or switched to an idle partial bandwidth. It is possible to save battery by preventing the terminal from performing PDCCH monitoring for the cell, and enabling the terminal to perform channel measurement for the downlink partial bandwidth and report the channel measurement result, so that a fast cell or partial bandwidth can be activated later can support In addition, the battery of the terminal may be saved by transitioning the downlink (or uplink) partial bandwidth in the one cell to an inactive state. In the above, the state transition instruction or partial bandwidth switching instruction for each partial bandwidth for each cell may be set and instructed by an RRC message or downlink control information (DCI) of MAC CE or PDCCH.

The dormant partial bandwidth may also be extended and applied to dual access technology, and may be applied, for example, to a PSCell of a secondary cell group. As another method, by extending the concept of cell group suspension or cell group deactivation, one cell group (eg, secondary cell group) of a terminal in which dual access technology is set is assigned to a cell group. Power consumption of the UE can be reduced by instructing stop or deactivation to stop data transmission or reception in the indicated cell group, to stop PDCCH monitoring, or to intermittently monitor PDCCH based on a very long period. there is. In addition, when receiving an instruction to stop or deactivate the cell group, the terminal performs a channel measurement procedure in the cell group instructed to stop or deactivate the cell group, and transmits the channel measurement result to a network (eg, to a master cell group or a secondary cell group). to), so that it can support the rapid activation of dual access technology. For the cell group instructed to suspend or deactivate the cell group in the above, the terminal performs the above procedure, or the cell group configuration information may be maintained and stored without being discarded or released, or the cell group activation or resumption instruction of the network may be instructed. It may be characterized in that the cell group setting information is restored according to. For example, configuration information of the cell group set in the terminal (for example, configuration information of each PDCP or RLC or MAC layer device or bearer configuration information or configuration information for each cell may be stored or maintained as it is. However, the cell group If this is suspended or deactivated, the bearers or the RLC bearer of the bearer may be stopped, or transmission (or data transmission, eg, SCG transmission) in the cell group may be suspended. If a cell group resume or activation instruction is received for a cell group instructed to suspend or deactivate, the terminal may resume, restore, or reapply configuration information of the cell group, bearer or RLC bearer, or cell group Restart transmission (eg SCG transmission) or data transmission or reception may be resumed or PDCCH monitoring may be restarted or channel measurement reporting may be performed or periodically configured transmission resources may be reactivated. .

In the above case, when the cell group is stopped or deactivated, stopping the bearer (bearer using RLC UM (unacknowledged mode) mode or RLC AM (acknowledged mode) mode) means stopping the PDCP layer device or RLC layer device. (or stop sending or receiving data or processing data), and do not transmit (or receive) data for the bearer (or corresponding to the logical channel identifier corresponding to the bearer) in the MAC layer device (or not selecting the logical channel identifier as a target in a logical channel prioritization (LCP) procedure). In the above procedure for stopping the PDCP layer device, embodiments specifically proposed in the following of the present disclosure may be applied.

If the cell group is stopped or deactivated in the above, stopping the RLC bearer (RLC bearer using RLC UM mode or RLC bearer using RLC AM mode) means stopping the RLC layer device (or data transmission or reception or stop data processing), that the MAC layer device does not transmit (or receive) data for the bearer (or corresponding to the logical channel identifier corresponding to the bearer) (or LCP (Logical Channel Prioritization) procedure It may mean that the logical channel identifier is not selected as a target in In the above, stopping the RLC bearer may mean that the PDCP layer device connected to the RLC layer device can continue to process data. For example, a PDCP layer device connected to the suspended RLC bearer processes data through another RLC bearer (eg, an RLC bearer belonging to a cell group (eg MCG) different from the cell group (eg SCG)) It can transmit or receive data and process it.

In the above case, when the cell group is stopped or deactivated, stopping transmission (eg, SCG transmission) for the cell group means that the bearer belonging to the cell group in the MAC layer device (bearer using RLC UM mode or RLC AM mode) Not transmitting (or receiving) data for (or corresponding to the logical channel identifier corresponding to the bearer) (or, in the LCP (Logical Channel Prioritization) procedure, the logical channel identifier may mean not to be selected as a target). However, stopping transmission (eg, SCG transmission) to the cell group may mean that data processing or data pre-processing is possible in a PDCP layer device or an RLC layer device. For example, although data (or uplink data) of an upper layer device is not transmitted in the cell group, a PDCP layer device, an RLC layer device, or a MAC layer device may perform data processing in advance for transmission. there is.

If the cell group is resumed or activated in the above, resuming the bearer (bearer using RLC UM mode or bearer using RLC AM mode) means resuming PDCP layer device or RLC layer device (or data transmission or reception or resume data processing), that the MAC layer device transmits (or receives) data for the bearer (or corresponding to the logical channel identifier corresponding to the bearer) (or in the LCP (Logical Channel Prioritization) procedure, the logical selecting a channel identifier as a target).

If the cell group is resumed or activated in the above, resuming the RLC bearer (RLC bearer using RLC UM mode or RLC bearer using RLC AM mode) means resuming the RLC layer device (or transmitting or receiving data or data Resuming processing), transmitting (or receiving) data for the bearer (or corresponding to the logical channel identifier corresponding to the bearer) in the MAC layer device (or the logical channel identifier in the LCP (Logical Channel Prioritization) procedure It can mean selecting as a target). Resuming the RLC bearer may mean that data is transmitted to a PDCP layer device connected to the RLC layer device or data is received from the PDCP layer device.

When the cell group is resumed or activated in the above, resuming transmission (eg, SCG transmission) for the cell group means that the bearer belonging to the cell group in the MAC layer device (bearer using RLC UM mode or RLC AM mode) Transmitting (or receiving) data for (or corresponding to the logical channel identifier corresponding to the bearer) (or selecting the logical channel identifier as a target in the LCP (Logical Channel Prioritization) procedure) that) can mean However, resuming transmission (eg, SCG transmission) for the cell group may mean that data processing or data pre-processing is possible in a PDCP layer device or an RLC layer device. For example, data (or uplink data) of an upper layer device can be transmitted in the cell group, and data processing can be performed in advance for transmission in a PDCP layer device, RLC layer device, or MAC layer device. .

Alternatively, if the cell group is stopped or deactivated in the above, the bearer (or RLC bearer) using the RLC UM mode is stopped to stop the PDCP layer device or the RLC layer device to stop data transmission or reception, or It can cause data processing to stop, or it can cause the MAC layer device to stop sending or receiving data. However, for a bearer using the RLC AM mode (or an RLC bearer), transmission to the cell group is stopped so that data processing can be continuously performed for the PDCP layer device or RLC layer device, or the data processing in the MAC layer device is stopped. You can stop sending or receiving. Because if the security key is changed, there is a retransmission (or regeneration) procedure for the RLC AM bearer in the PDCP re-establishment procedure (thus, if the security key is not changed, the data processing speed can be reduced. In addition, the security key If it is changed, data loss does not occur due to the retransmission (or regeneration) procedure). Since there is no retransmission (or regeneration) procedure for the RLC UM bearer, if the data processing procedure is performed in advance in the RLC UM bearer, data loss occurs inside the terminal. This is because this can occur (if the security key is not changed, the data processing speed can be reduced. However, if the security key is changed, there is no retransmission (or regeneration) procedure, and in the PDCP layer device and RLC layer device re-establishment procedure Data loss occurs because all data is discarded). Accordingly, different procedures may be applied to bearers (or RLC bearers) using the RLC AM mode and bearers (or RLC bearers) using the RLC UM mode. In the above procedure for stopping the PDCP layer device, embodiments specifically proposed in the following of the present disclosure may be applied.

In the cell group configuration information or cell (SpCell (Pcell or PSCell) or SCell) configuration information or in previously set cell group configuration information or cell (SpCell (Pcell or PSCell) or SCell) configuration information or in cell group or cell (SpCell) configuration information (Pcell or PSCell) or SCell) A fast cell group or cell (SpCell (Pcell or PSCell) Alternatively, SCell) may be configured by including first channel measurement setting information for activation. In the first channel measurement setting information, in order to quickly activate the cell group, the base station can quickly perform channel measurement in the cell (for example, PCell, PSCell, or SCell) setting information of the cell group. Frequent channel measurement signals (e.g., Radios resource or Reference Signal or TRS (temporary reference signal) or SSB (synchronization signal block) or CSI-RS (channel state information reference)) signal) or reference signal (RS) or transmitted transmission resource information (frequency or time transmission resource at which the frequent channel measurement signal is transmitted) or interval or number (the number of times the frequent channel measurement signal is transmitted) or timer Value (time during which the frequent channel measurement signal is transmitted) or time interval (interval during which the frequent channel measurement signal is transmitted (eg, offset in time units (slot, subframe, symbol, etc.)) or measured by the terminal It may include configuration information such as transmission resources or period or interval or timing or offset for reporting a result, etc. In the above, the first channel measurement configuration information is a reporting period (or Transmission resources) can be set short, or many signals for channel measurement (or transmission resources or (for example, Radios resource or Reference Signal or TRS (Temporary Reference Signal) Signal)) can be characterized in that the base station can set transmission resources for channel measurement so that the base station can transmit a lot or frequently. In the above, the first channel measurement setting information is specified by the base station in the cell or partial bandwidth It may include configuration information about a signal for measuring a channel for a terminal (or terminals). For example, the period of the channel measurement signal or the number of signals transmitted, the period during which the signal is transmitted, the offset for the time during which the signal is transmitted, the length of time between signals to be transmitted, or a plurality of signals for measurement of channels that can be transmitted A list of data or a time transmission resource (or frequency transmission resource) indicating the position of a signal to be transmitted, a transmission resource (time transmission resource or frequency transmission resource) for reporting measurement results, or a period for reporting measurement results, etc. can include In addition, the first channel measurement configuration information may be set differently for each cell or for each partial bandwidth for a plurality of cells or partial bandwidths configured in the RRC message, and the terminal can easily measure transmission resources for channel measurement. In order to support this, beam-related setting information (transmission configuration indication (TCI) state or quasi co-location (QCL)) such as beam direction, beam number, or beam position may be set together. In addition, the first channel measurement setting information includes a timing advance (TA) value (or offset value) for synchronizing the downlink signal of the base station or the uplink signal of the base station, or a timer indicating the validity of the TA value (TAT, time alignment timer) or timer value (TAT value) to correctly perform channel measurement or channel measurement report. In addition, the first channel measurement configuration information set as the RRC message may include a plurality of signal information for channel measurement, and any one of the plurality of channel measurement signal information set above as an RRC message or MAC CE or DCI One channel measurement signal information or beam configuration information may be indicated so that the terminal performs channel measurement or channel measurement report by applying or using the indicated channel measurement signal information or beam configuration information. The method indicated above may define a mapping between a bitmap, index, or identifier and signal information for measurement of each channel set above, and may indicate the mapping based on this. In another method, by setting or instructing signal information for channel measurement with the RRC message or MAC CE, the terminal performs channel measurement by applying or using the set (or indicated) signal information for channel measurement, or A channel measurement report may be performed.

The first channel measurement configuration information proposed in the present disclosure may be initially deactivated when configured as an RRC message or after handover, and later MAC control information or PDCCH DCI proposed in the present disclosure It can be activated by information or RRC message. When the RRC message is configured as described above, the base station can easily manage the cell state or the channel measurement procedure of the UE only when the initial state is inactive, and the UE can measure when and how the channel is measured without processing delay of the RRC message. The timing of what to do can also be done accurately.

The first channel measurement setting information proposed in the present disclosure may be characterized in that only downlink partial bandwidth setting information of each cell can be set. That is, the first channel measurement configuration information proposed in the present disclosure may not be set for uplink partial bandwidth configuration information of each cell. This is because the UE must first measure the channel for the downlink so that it can correctly receive the PDCCH and follow the instructions to the base station after reporting the measurement result for the channel or cell.

In addition, in a message indicating activation or resumption of the cell group or cell (SpCell (Pcell or PSCell) or SCell) (eg, RRC message or RRCReconfiguration or MAC control information or downlink control information (DCI) of PDCCH), the cell group may include second channel measurement setting information for measuring a signal of a cell (PSCell, PCell, or SCell) of The second channel measurement setting information may include general channel measurement setting information such as transmission resource or period or time interval or number of times of a signal for channel measurement or transmission resource or period or time interval for channel measurement report.

In the present disclosure, the first channel measurement setting information or the second channel measurement setting information of the terminal may be applied according to the following conditions to measure the channel and report the measurement result to the base station.

- 1> If the UE receives a message to activate (or resume) a cell (PCell or PSCell or SCell) or cell group (eg PDCCH indicator or MAC control information or RRC message)

■ 2> If the first channel measurement setting information is set for the terminal

◆ 3> Confirm that the base station will frequently transmit many channel measurement signals according to the first channel measurement setting information of the terminal, and temporarily (eg, the first channel measurement setting information) according to the first channel measurement setting information. Until the time interval set in the channel measurement configuration information of (eg, subframe or slot or symbol) or during the promised (or predetermined) time interval considering the offset or during the time (eg, while the timer is running) ) or many or frequent channel measurement signals can be measured until the first condition is satisfied. In addition, according to the period or transmission resource set in the first channel measurement setting information, the measured channel measurement result is set up to a time interval (eg, subframe, slot, or symbol) or offset set in the first channel measurement setting information. In consideration of this, the channel measurement result may be reported during an promised (or pre-determined) time period or time (eg, while a timer is running) or until the first condition is satisfied. Therefore, since the terminal can quickly measure and quickly report the frequent channel measurement signal in the above, it is possible to quickly activate (or resume) a cell (PCell or SCell or PSCell) or cell group or quickly receive scheduling information. . If after the time interval set in the first channel measurement configuration information above (for example, subframe or slot or symbol) or after the promised (or predetermined) time interval or after time (for example, when the timer expires) or after the first If the second channel measurement setting information is set in the terminal after satisfying the condition of, the application of the first channel measurement setting information is stopped or released, and the channel measurement signal can be measured according to the second channel measurement setting information. there is. For example, it is possible to fall back from the first channel measurement setting information to the second channel measurement information, or the second channel information can be applied instead of the first channel measurement setting information. In addition, the measured channel measurement result may be reported according to the period or transmission resource set in the second channel measurement setting information. In the above, if the second channel measurement configuration information is not set, channel measurement may not be performed.

■ 2> Otherwise (if the first channel measurement setting information is not set in the terminal)

◆ 3> If the second channel measurement setting information is set in the terminal, the channel measurement signal can be measured according to the second channel measurement setting information. In addition, the measured channel measurement result may be reported according to the period or transmission resource set in the second channel measurement setting information. In the above, if the second channel measurement configuration information is not set, channel measurement may not be performed.

The first condition in the above of the present disclosure may be one of the following conditions. In the following of the present disclosure, when activating a cell under the first condition or when activating or resuming a cell group, or when an RRC inactive mode terminal resumes a connection in an RRC connection resumption procedure, the base station uses unnecessarily many transmission resources. Alternatively, efficient conditions that do not require frequent transmission resources are proposed. For example, the first channel measurement setting information may be applied and a channel measurement procedure or a channel measurement reporting procedure may be performed until one of the following conditions is satisfied.

- The terminal successfully performs a random access procedure (four-step random access procedure or two-step random access procedure) in the cell (eg, PCell or SCell or PSCell) or in a cell (eg, PSCell or SCell) of a cell group or when the random access procedure is successfully completed and the first uplink transmission resource is allocated, or when the uplink transmission resource is instructed to the UE for the first time, it can be determined that the first condition is satisfied. .

■ For example, more specifically, if the UE performs contention free random access (CFRA), a preamble or UE cell identifier (eg, C-RNTI) is assigned if it is)

◆ When the terminal transmits a preamble preamble to the cell and receives a random access response (RAR) message or receives a PDCCH indication for the random access response, the random access procedure is considered to have been successfully completed. Therefore, it can be determined that the first condition is satisfied. Alternatively, it may be determined that the first condition is satisfied when an uplink transmission resource is received for the first time after RAR reception.

■ If the UE performs contention-based random access (CBRA) (eg, if a preamble or UE cell identifier (eg, C-RNTI) is not allocated)

◆ The terminal transmits a preamble (eg, random preamble) to the cell, receives a random access response (RAR) message, and transmits an uplink assigned to, included in, or indicated in the random access response message When message 3 (for example, handover complete message) is transmitted using resources and contention resolution MAC CE (MAC CE) indicating that contention resolution has been resolved with message 4 is received from the target base station, or in the UE's C-RNTI When receiving uplink transmission resources through the corresponding PDCCH, the terminal can determine that the first condition is satisfied because it can be regarded that the random access procedure to the target base station has been successfully completed. As another method, when the size of uplink transmission resources allocated in the random access response message is sufficient to transmit message 3 and the terminal can additionally transmit uplink data, it is determined that uplink transmission resources have been received for the first time and the It may be determined that the first condition is satisfied. That is, when RAR is received, it may be determined that uplink transmission resources are received for the first time and it may be determined that the first condition is satisfied.

- 1> If the terminal performs a 2-step random access procedure (2-tep Random access) set or instructed

- 1> or if the 2-step random access procedure (2-tep Random access) is not configured or instructed in the message, but the terminal supports the 2-step random access procedure in the terminal capability and the 2-step random access procedure in the system information of the cell If the access procedure is supported and information for the two-step random access procedure is broadcasted in the system information (eg, random access resources or a threshold value for determining whether or not to perform the two-step random access, etc.) or the terminal When the terminal receives the system information and the signal strength is greater than or greater than the threshold value broadcast in the system information, the terminal performs a two-step random access procedure for the cell,

■ 2> When the step 2 random access procedure is successfully completed, the terminal may determine that the first condition is satisfied.

■ 2> The two-step random access procedure may be specifically performed by one of a contention based random access (CBRA) method and a contention-free random access (CFRA) method.

◆ 3> If the terminal performs the CBRA-based 2-step random access procedure above,

● 4> The UE transmits a preamble in a transmission resource for step 2 random access (eg, a transmission resource set by a PRACH occasion or an RRC message by a base station or a transmission resource broadcast in system information), and transmission for data transmission Data (eg, MsgA MAC PDU) may be transmitted on a resource (eg, PUSCH occasion). The data may include MAC control information (C-RNTI MAC CE) including a terminal identifier (C-RNTI) or an RRC message (RRCReconfigurationComplete message or handover complete message).

● 4> In the above, the UE can monitor the scrambled PDCCH with the UE identifier (C-RNTI) or the first identifier (MsgB-RNTI) derived by the time or frequency of transmitting the preamble.

● 4> If the terminal receives a PDCCH scrambled with a terminal identifier, or if downlink transmission resources are allocated in the PDCCH, or MAC control information (timing advance command MAC CE) for time timing adjustment in the downlink transmission resources if you receive

■ 5> The terminal may determine that the step 2 random access procedure has been successfully completed and that the first condition is satisfied.

● 4> If the terminal receives the PDCCH scrambled with the first identifier (MsgB-RNTI) or if the downlink transmission resource is allocated in the PDCCH, or if the terminal receives a fallback to the preamble transmitted from the downlink transmission resource If a fallback random access response is received (ie, if the base station receives the preamble but the base station does not receive MsgA, fallback RAR to transmit MsgA to another transmission resource)

■ 5> The UE may transmit data (MsgA MAC PDU) through the transmission resource indicated in the random access response for fallback.

■ 5> The terminal can monitor the PDCCH scrambled with the terminal identifier (C-RNTI).

■ 5> If the terminal receives the PDCCH scrambled with the terminal identifier or allocates uplink transmission resources in the PDCCH, the terminal determines that the step 2 random access procedure has been successfully completed and satisfies the first condition. can be judged to have been

◆ 3> If the terminal performs the CFRA-based 2-step random access procedure above,

4> The UE transmits a preamble in a transmission resource for step 2 random access (eg, a PRACH occasion or a transmission resource designated by the base station in an RRC message), and a transmission resource for data transmission (eg, PUSCH occasion ) can transmit data (eg, MsgA MAC PDU). The data may include MAC control information (C-RNTI MAC CE) including a terminal identifier (C-RNTI) or an RRC message (RRCReconfigurationComplete message or handover complete message).

● 4> In the above, the UE can monitor the scrambled PDCCH with the UE identifier (C-RNTI) or the first identifier (MsgB-RNTI) derived by the time or frequency of transmitting the preamble.

● 4> If the terminal receives a PDCCH scrambled with a terminal identifier, or if downlink transmission resources are allocated in the PDCCH, or MAC control information (timing advance command MAC CE) for time timing adjustment in the downlink transmission resources if you receive

■ 5> The terminal may determine that the step 2 random access procedure has been successfully completed and may determine that the first condition is satisfied.

● 4> If the terminal receives the PDCCH scrambled with the first identifier (MsgB-RNTI) or if the downlink transmission resource is allocated in the PDCCH, or if the terminal receives a fallback to the preamble transmitted from the downlink transmission resource If a fallback random access response is received (ie, if the base station receives the preamble but the base station does not receive MsgA, fallback RAR to transmit MsgA to another transmission resource)

■ 5> The terminal may determine that the step 2 random access procedure has been successfully completed and may determine that the first condition is satisfied.

■ 5> The terminal may transmit data (MsgA MAC PDU) with the transmission resource indicated in the random access response for fallback.

- 1> It may be determined that the first condition is satisfied when starting the random access procedure or transmitting a preamble for the random access procedure.

- 1> As another method, if a 2-tep random access procedure is set or instructed in the message to the terminal, the terminal may determine that the first condition is satisfied. For example, in the above case, the terminal may determine that the first condition is satisfied before starting the second-step random access procedure.

- 1> Another method, if a 2-tep random access procedure (2-tep random access) is set or instructed in the message to the terminal, and the transmission resource (PUSCH) set for data transmission in the 2-step random access procedure is If it is greater than the threshold of 1 or if a setting value for time timing adjustment (timing advance value) is included in the RRC message, the terminal may determine that the first condition is satisfied. In the above, the first threshold may be set by an RRC message (eg, RRCReconfiguration) by the base station, may be broadcast in system information, or may be set by the size of data that the terminal has to transmit. For example, in the above case, the terminal may determine that the first condition is satisfied before starting the second-step random access procedure. Alternatively, if a setting value for time timing adjustment (timing advance value) is included in the RRC message or if a 2-step random access procedure is set, the terminal does not transmit the preamble, and the set transmission resource (e.g., RRC The UE may monitor the transmission resource set by the message or the PDCCH of the target base station and transmit data directly on the transmission resource indicated by the PDCCH. Accordingly, in the above case, the terminal may determine that the first condition is satisfied before starting the second-step random access procedure or when or before transmitting the data. Alternatively, if a setting value for time timing adjustment (timing advance value) is included in the RRC message or if a two-step random access procedure is set, the terminal does not transmit a preamble and transmits a set transmission resource (PUSCH) (eg, The UE may monitor the transmission resource set by the RRC message or the PDCCH of the target base station and transmit data directly on the transmission resource indicated by the PDCCH. In the above case, if the set transmission resource (PUSCH) (eg, the transmission resource set by the RRC message or the transmission resource indicated by the PDCCH after the terminal monitors the PDCCH of the target base station) is greater than the first threshold or the RRC If a setting value for time timing adjustment (Timing Advance value) is included in the message, the terminal may determine that the first condition is satisfied before starting the second-step random access procedure or when or before transmitting the data. .

- 1> RRC INACTIVE mode If the terminal transmits the RRCResumeRequest message and then receives the RRCResume message (or RRCSetup message) in response, it can be considered that the first condition is satisfied.

- 1> When a timer indicating a period for channel measurement expires when the terminal performs channel measurement based on the first channel measurement configuration information set in the RRC message,

- 1> When the terminal performs channel measurement based on the first channel measurement configuration information set in the RRC message, when the time interval indicating the period for channel measurement has passed (or expired) or all time intervals If used (or applied);

- 1> When the terminal performs channel measurement based on the first channel measurement configuration information set in the RRC message, when all signals for channel measurement are measured (or completed) by the set number of times or by the set number of times When a signal is received,

- 1> When the terminal performs channel measurement based on the first channel measurement configuration information set in the RRC message, when channel measurement is completed based on the configuration information (channel measurement expires) or channel measurement report (or if the channel measurement report has expired),

If the first condition is satisfied in the above, the upper layer device (eg RRC layer device) instructs the lower layer device (eg PDCP layer device or RLC layer device or MAC layer device or PHY layer device) with an indicator. Alternatively, a lower layer device (eg, a PDCP layer device, an RLC layer device, a MAC layer device, or a PHY layer device) may instruct an upper layer device (eg, an RRC layer device).

The methods for setting or applying the first channel measurement configuration information proposed in the present disclosure are RRC connection when activating or resuming a cell group (eg, PSCell), activating SCell, or in RRC inactive mode. may be extended and set and used when resuming (eg, when using the RRCResume message) or when performing a handover procedure (eg, when using the RRCReconfiguration message).

In the present disclosure, the partial bandwidth (BWP) can be used without distinguishing between uplink and downlink, and its meaning can indicate the uplink partial bandwidth and the downlink partial bandwidth, respectively, depending on the context.

In the present disclosure, link can be used without distinguishing between uplink and downlink, and the meaning can indicate uplink and downlink, respectively, depending on the context.

In the present disclosure, a cell is a PCell or SCell (eg, a SCell configured in a master cell group (MCG, Master Cell Group)) or a PSCell (eg, a PCell of a secondary cell group (SCG, Secondary Cell Group)) or a SCell ( For example, a SCell) configured in a secondary cell group (SCG) may be indicated. In the present disclosure, a dormant partial bandwidth (dormant BWP) is set or introduced for the SCell or PSCell of a terminal performing carrier aggregation technology or dual access technology, and PDCCH is not monitored in the dormant partial bandwidth to reduce battery consumption of the terminal In the dormant partial bandwidth, channel measurement is performed and reported (eg, channel state information (CSI) or channel quality information (CQI) measurement or report) or beam measurement or beam tracking or beam operation is performed When data transmission is required, switching or activating the normal partial bandwidth (normal BWP) enables data transmission to be quickly started in the normal partial bandwidth. In the above, the idle part bandwidth is set for SpCell (MCG's PCell or SCG's PCell (or PSCell)) or PUCCH-configured SCell that needs to continuously monitor signals, send or receive feedback, or check and maintain synchronization. Or you can choose not to apply.

In the above, if the UE is instructed to switch to or activate the SCell of the master cell group through the PCell to the dormant partial bandwidth, the UE performs a channel measurement procedure for the dormant partial bandwidth of the SCell, and displays the measured channel measurement result. In the transmission resources of the PCell of the master cell group (MCG) (eg, through the PUCCH (Physical Uplink Control Channel) transmission resources of the PCell) or the SCell (eg, PUCCH (Physical Uplink Control Channel) where the PUCCH of the master cell group is set) It can be reported in the transmission resource of Channel) through the transmission resource. In the above, which cell or which transmission resource (for example, PUCCH or PUSCH) of which cell to report the channel measurement result for the partial bandwidth of which cell can be set for each cell or each partial bandwidth to the UE through an RRC message. .

In the above, if the UE is instructed to switch or activate the SCell of the secondary cell group to the dormant partial bandwidth through the PSCell, the UE performs a channel measurement procedure for the dormant partial bandwidth of the SCell, and returns the measured channel measurement result. In the transmission resources of the PSCell of the secondary cell group (SCG) (eg, through the PUCCH (Physical Uplink Control Channel) transmission resource of the PSCell) or the SCell (eg, PUCCH (Physical Uplink Control Channel) where the PUCCH of the secondary cell group is set) It can be reported in the transmission resource of Channel) through the transmission resource. In the above, which cell or which transmission resource (for example, PUCCH or PUSCH) of which cell to report the channel measurement result for the partial bandwidth of which cell can be set for each cell or each partial bandwidth to the UE through an RRC message. .

In the above, if the UE is instructed to switch or activate the PSCell or SCell of the secondary cell group to the idle partial bandwidth through the PCell, or the secondary cell group (SCG or PSCell), cell group suspension (SCG suspension or cell group suspension) if instructed. The UE performs a channel measurement procedure for the partial bandwidth (the partial bandwidth set by the RRC message or the last activated partial bandwidth) or the idle partial bandwidth of the PSCell or SCell, and transmits the measured channel measurement result to the master cell group (MCG). In transmission resources of PCell (eg, through physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) transmission resources of PCell) or in transmission resources of SCell in which PUCCH of the master cell group is configured (eg, physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) transmission resources) It can be reported through) or in the transmission resource of the PSCell of the secondary cell group (SCG) (eg, through the physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) transmission resource of the PSCell). In the above, which cell or which transmission resource (eg, PUCCH or PUSCH) of which cell to report the channel measurement result for the partial bandwidth of which cell can be set to the UE by cell or by partial bandwidth in an RRC message. .

In the present disclosure, the SCell of the terminal (the SCell of the master cell group when the carrier aggregation technology is configured or the SCell of the secondary cell group when the dual access technology is configured) or the PSCell (the PCell of the secondary cell group when the dual access technology is configured) For this, in order to operate the dormant partial bandwidth or cell group suspended state proposed above, various embodiments that operate based on DCI of PDCCH or MAC CE or RRC message are proposed.

A network or a base station may set Spcell (Pcell and PScell) and a plurality of Scells to the terminal. In the above, Spcell indicates Pcell when the terminal communicates with one base station, and indicates Pcell of the master base station or PScell of the secondary base station when the terminal communicates with two base stations (master base station and secondary base station). . In the above, Pcell or Pscell may indicate a main cell used when the terminal and the base station communicate in each MAC layer device, and perform random access with timing to perform synchronization, HARQ ACK / NACK feedback with PUCCH transmission resources It may mean a cell that sends and receives most of the control signals. In the above, a technology in which a base station operates a plurality of Scells together with an SPcell to increase transmission resources and to increase uplink or downlink data transmission resources is referred to as carrier aggregation technology or dual access technology.

In the present disclosure, PCell may mean a Master Cell Group (MCG), and PSCell may mean a Secondary Cell Group (SCG). In addition, MCG may include a PCell and SCells configured in the MCG, and SCG may include a PSCell and SCells configured in the SCG. Also, a cell may indicate a cell group, or a cell group may indicate a cell.

When the UE receives the Spcell and a plurality of Scells configured in an RRC message, the state or mode for each cell (PCell, PSCell, or SCell) or each Scell or partial bandwidth of each SCell or cell group is transmitted through the RRC message or MAC CE It can be set as DCI or DCI of PDCCH. In the above, the state or mode of the cell may be set to an active mode or an activated state and a deactivated mode or a deactivated state. In the above, the cell is in an active mode or an active state means that the terminal has an uplink link with the base station in a partial bandwidth other than the activated partial bandwidth of the cell, the activated general partial bandwidth, or the activated dormant partial bandwidth of the cell in the activated mode or activated cell. Alternatively, downlink data can be transmitted and received, the PDCCH is monitored to confirm an instruction from the base station, and the active mode or cell in the active state (or activated partial bandwidth of the cell or activated general partial bandwidth or activated dormant mode) It may perform channel measurement for the downlink of a partial bandwidth) and periodically report measurement information to the base station, and the terminal may perform a pilot signal (eg, sounding It may mean that a reference signal (SRS) can be periodically transmitted to the base station. Alternatively, the terminal may activate or switch the partial bandwidth to the dormant partial bandwidth according to the base station's instruction (eg, PDCCH, MAC CE, or RRC message) for the activated cell, and the dormant partial bandwidth in the activated cell. If is activated, the UE may perform a procedure for performing a channel measurement report and reporting a channel measurement result without performing PDCCH monitoring in the cell.

As another method, in the above, if the cell in which the idle partial bandwidth is activated is the SCell, the UE does not monitor the PDCCH or does not receive downlink data, or performs channel measurement or measurement result reporting, or sets periodic transmission resources (e.g. For example, the type 1 periodic transmission resource (configured uplink grant type 1) is suspended (suspended) or the configured periodic transmission resource (eg, type 2 periodic transmission resource (configured uplink grant type 2) is released (clear). ) or initialization, or SRS (sounding reference signal) may not be transmitted, or uplink data may not be transmitted, or PUCCH (eg, SR (scheduling request) or preamble for random access) However, if the cell in which the idle bandwidth is activated or the cell for which cell group suspension is instructed is a PSCell, the UE does not monitor the PDCCH or performs PDCCH monitoring at a very long period or downlink data does not receive, or performs channel measurement or measurement result reporting, or suspends a configured periodic transmission resource (eg, type 1 periodic transmission resource (configured uplink grant type 1)) or configured periodic transmission resource (For example, type 2 periodic transmission resources (configured uplink grant type 2) may be cleared or initialized, or a Sounding Reference Signal (SRS) may be transmitted, or uplink data may not be transmitted. Alternatively, PUCCH (eg, scheduling request (SR) or preamble for random access) may be transmitted, or a random access procedure may be performed.

In the above, if the cell activated with a partial bandwidth other than the idle partial bandwidth is the SCell, the UE monitors the PDCCH, receives downlink data, measures the channel or reports the measurement result, or sets the periodic transmission resource ( For example, a type 1 periodic transmission resource (configured uplink grant type 1) is resumed or a configured periodic transmission resource (eg, a type 2 periodic transmission resource (configured uplink grant type 2) is configured or Can be activated or can transmit a sounding reference signal (SRS) or can transmit uplink data or can transmit PUCCH (eg, a preamble for scheduling request (SR) or random access), or random access procedure can be performed.

In the above, if the cell activated with a partial bandwidth other than the idle partial bandwidth or a cell for which cell group resumption (SCG resumption) is indicated is a PSCell, the UE performs PDCCH monitoring, receives downlink data, or measures a channel or reports a measurement result. Perform or resume a configured periodic transmission resource (eg, type 1 periodic transmission resource (configured uplink grant type 1)) or configured periodic transmission resource (eg, type 2 periodic transmission resource (configured uplink grant type 1) configured uplink grant type 2) may be set or activated, or SRS (sounding reference signal) may be transmitted, or uplink data may be transmitted, or PUCCH (eg, SR (scheduling request) or preamble for random access ) may be transmitted, or a random access procedure may be performed.

However, the inactive mode or inactive state of the cell means that the terminal is in a state of inactivating the partial bandwidths set in the cell, or the set partial bandwidths are not activated, or there is no activated partial bandwidth among the set partial bandwidths, so that the terminal cannot exchange data with the base station. None, it may mean that the PDCCH is not monitored to check the indication of the base station, channel measurement is not performed, measurement report is not performed, and pilot signal is not transmitted.

Therefore, in order to activate cells in the inactive mode, the base station first sets frequency measurement configuration information to the terminal through an RRC message, and the terminal performs cell or frequency measurement based on the frequency measurement configuration information. In addition, the base station may activate the deactivated cells based on the frequency/channel measurement information after receiving the cell or frequency measurement report of the terminal. Due to this, a lot of delay occurs when the base station activates carrier aggregation technology or dual access technology for the terminal and starts transmitting or receiving data.

In the present disclosure, dormant partial bandwidth (dormant BWP) or dormant BWP for the partial bandwidth of each activated cell (eg, activated Scell or activated PSCell) so that the battery of the terminal can be saved and data transmission or reception can be started quickly. A dormant state is proposed, or a dormant bandwidth part (BWP (Band Width Part)) is proposed to be set or introduced for each activated cell. Alternatively, when the dual access technology is set in the terminal, the state of each cell group is activated, dormant, suspended, deactivated, or resumed for each cell group. It is proposed to set or introduce, and a method of performing a cell group suspension (SCG suspension or cell group suspension) or cell group resumption (SCG resumption or cell group resumption) instruction indicating the cell group state transition and terminal operation accordingly Suggest.

In the partial bandwidth or dormant partial bandwidth (dormant BWP in activated SCell), which is the dormant mode of the activated cell, or when the dormant partial bandwidth is activated, the terminal cannot exchange data with the base station, or check the instructions of the base station. It is characterized in that the PDCCH is not monitored or the pilot signal is not transmitted, but the channel measurement is performed, and the measurement results for the measured frequency / cell / channel are reported periodically or when an event occurs according to the base station setting. to be Therefore, since the terminal does not monitor the PDCCH and does not transmit a pilot signal in the dormant partial bandwidth (dormant BWP) of the activated cell, compared to the normal partial bandwidth (or partial bandwidth other than the dormant partial bandwidth) of the activated cell Alternatively, the battery can be saved compared to activating the general partial bandwidth (or partial bandwidth other than the idle partial bandwidth) of the activated cell, and since the channel measurement report is performed unlike when the cell is deactivated, the base station reports the measurement Transmission delay can be reduced by rapidly activating the normal partial bandwidth of the activated cell based on the base or based on the measurement report of the dormant partial bandwidth of the activated cell so that the carrier aggregation technology can be used quickly.

Therefore, in the present disclosure, a cell in an active mode or an active state means that a terminal is a base station in a partial bandwidth other than an activated partial bandwidth of the cell, an activated general partial bandwidth, or an activated dormant partial bandwidth of the cell in the activated mode or activated cell. and uplink or downlink data can be exchanged, the PDCCH is monitored to check the instruction of the base station, and the activated mode or cell in the activated state (or activated partial bandwidth of the cell or activated normal partial bandwidth or The channel measurement for the downlink of the partial bandwidth other than the activated dormant partial bandwidth) may be performed and the measurement information may be periodically reported to the base station, and the terminal may perform a pilot signal (sounding It may mean that a reference signal (SRS) can be periodically transmitted to the base station. In addition, in the present disclosure, the fact that a cell is in an active mode or an active state means that the terminal cannot exchange uplink or downlink data with the base station in the active dormant bandwidth of the cell in the active mode or in the activated cell, or receive instructions from the base station. It may mean that the PDCCH is not monitored for confirmation, but channel measurement for the downlink of the activated idle partial bandwidth of the active mode or cell in the active state is performed and measurement information is periodically reported to the base station.

In the above, if the cell in which the idle bandwidth is activated or cell group suspension is instructed is the PSCell, PDCCH is not monitored, PDCCH monitoring is performed at a very long period, downlink data is not received, or channel measurement or measurement result report is not performed. Perform or suspend a configured periodic transmission resource (eg, type 1 periodic transmission resource (configured uplink grant type 1)) or set a periodic transmission resource (eg, type 2 periodic transmission resource (configured uplink grant type 1) configured uplink grant type 2) may be cleared or initialized, or SRS (sounding reference signal) may be transmitted, or uplink data may not be transmitted, or PUCCH (eg, SR (Scheduling Request) or random A preamble for access) may be transmitted, or a random access procedure may be performed.

As another method, if the cell for which cell group deactivation (or suspension) is indicated above is a PSCell (or SCG), PDCCH monitoring is not performed, PDCCH monitoring is performed at a very long period, or downlink data is not received, or Channel measurement or measurement result reporting is not performed, or a configured periodic transmission resource (eg, type 1 periodic transmission resource (configured uplink grant type 1) is suspended) or a configured periodic transmission resource (eg, configured uplink grant type 1) , Type 2 periodic transmission resources (configured uplink grant type 2) may be cleared or initialized, or Sounding Reference Signal (SRS) may not be transmitted or uplink data may not be transmitted, or PUCCH (For example, a preamble for scheduling request (SR) or random access) may not be transmitted. However, when cell group deactivation (or suspension) is indicated above, RRC indicating cell group deactivation (or suspension) In the message, a frequency measurement procedure (radio resource management) can be performed on the frequency measurement configuration information set by the base station, or if RLM (radio link monitoring) configuration information is set, an RLM procedure based on a timer (eg, T310) (When receiving an indication that the signal is not synchronized from the lower layer device (PHY layer device), a timer (eg, T310) is driven, and when the timer (eg, T310) expires, a radio connection failure is declared. If an indication that the synchronization of the signal is correct is received, the running timer (eg, T310) may be stopped. When beam-related configuration information is set to perform a beam failure detection procedure in an RRC message indicating deactivation (or suspension), the terminal may perform a beam failure detection procedure.

In addition, in the present disclosure, a dormant partial bandwidth may represent a state of a partial bandwidth, or a dormant partial bandwidth may be used as a name of a logical concept indicating a specific partial bandwidth. Thus, the dormant sub-bandwidth can be activated or deactivated or switched. For example, an instruction to switch the second partial bandwidth activated in the first cell to a dormant partial bandwidth, or an instruction to make the first cell dormant or transition to a dormant mode, or an instruction to transition the first cell to the dormant partial bandwidth, or the dormant partial bandwidth of the first cell An instruction to activate may be interpreted in the same meaning.

In addition, in the present disclosure, the normal partial bandwidth may represent partial bandwidths other than the dormant partial bandwidth among the partial bandwidths set in each cell of the UE by means of an RRC message. It can monitor the PDCCH to check the instruction of the base station, perform channel measurement for downlink and periodically report measurement information to the base station, and the terminal can perform uplink channel measurement so that the base station can perform pilot A signal (sounding reference signal, SRS) may be periodically transmitted to the base station. In addition, the normal partial bandwidth may indicate an initial activation partial bandwidth, a basic partial bandwidth, or an initial activation partial bandwidth activated from dormancy or an initial partial bandwidth.

In addition, among the partial bandwidths set in each cell of the UE, only one dormant partial bandwidth may be set and may be set for downlink. Alternatively, one dormant partial bandwidth may be set for uplink or downlink among partial bandwidths set in each cell of the terminal.

Also, in the present disclosure, the state of a cell group may be set to an activated state, a suspended state, or an inactive state. The state of the cell group may be indicated by a DCI bitmap or indicator of the PDCCH, MAC control information, or an RRC message indicator. In the case where the state of the cell group is indicated as an active state in the above, configuration information of the cell group set or indicated by an RRC message (eg, an RRCReconfiguration message, an RRCSetup message, or an RRCResume message) may be stored and applied in the terminal. Alternatively, it can be restored or restarted, and the PCell or PSCell of the cell group or the configured SCell performs PDCCH monitoring according to the setting of the RRC message, receives downlink data, or measures a channel or reports a measurement result. or resume a configured periodic transmission resource (eg, type 1 periodic transmission resource (configured uplink grant type 1)) or a configured periodic transmission resource (eg, type 2 periodic transmission A resource (configured uplink grant type 2) may be set or activated, or a sounding reference signal (SRS) may be transmitted, or uplink data may be transmitted, or PUCCH (eg, SR (scheduling request) or random access) preamble) may be transmitted or a random access procedure may be performed.

In addition, when the state of the cell group is indicated as suspended state or inactive state in the above, configuration information of the cell group set or indicated by an RRC message (eg, RRCReconfiguration message, RRCSetup message, or RRCResume message) The terminal does not store or discard, but the application may be stopped, and the PCell or PSCell of the cell group or the configured SCell does not monitor the PDCCH according to the configuration of the RRC message or performs PDCCH monitoring at a very long period or downlink Not receiving data, or performing channel measurement or measurement result reporting, or suspending a configured periodic transmission resource (eg, type 1 periodic transmission resource (configured uplink grant type 1)) or configured periodic transmission A resource (eg, type 2 periodic transmission resource (configured uplink grant type 2) may be cleared or initialized, or a sounding reference signal (SRS) may be transmitted or uplink data may not be transmitted, Alternatively, PUCCH (eg, scheduling request (SR) or preamble for random access) may be transmitted or a random access procedure may be performed.

In addition, when the state of the cell group is indicated to be inactive or when cell group configuration information release is instructed in the above, the cell group set or indicated by the RRC message (eg, RRCReconfiguration message, RRCSetup message, or RRCResume message) The configuration information may be released from the terminal or discarded.

1e is a diagram illustrating a procedure for providing a service to a terminal by efficiently using a very wide frequency bandwidth in a next-generation mobile communication system to which the present disclosure can be applied.

In FIG. 1E, it is described how the next-generation mobile communication system efficiently uses a very wide frequency bandwidth to provide services to terminals having various capabilities or categories and to save battery power.

One cell provided by the base station can serve a very wide frequency band such as 1e-05. However, in order to provide services to terminals with different capabilities, the wide frequency band can be divided into a plurality of partial bandwidths and managed as one cell.

First, a terminal that is initially powered on may search the entire frequency band provided by a public land mobile network (PLMN) in units of predetermined resource blocks (eg, in units of 12 resource blocks (RBs)). That is, the UE may start to search for a primary synchronization sequence (PSS)/secondary synchronization sequence (SSS) in the resource block unit in the entire system bandwidth (1e-10). If the signals are detected while searching for PSS/SSS (1e-01 or 1e-02) in units of the resource block, the signals are read and interpreted (decoded) to obtain subframes and radio transmission resource frames (Radio frame) boundary can be checked. Accordingly, subframes can be distinguished in units of 1 ms, and the base station and the downlink signal are synchronized. In the above, a resource block (RB) may be defined as a two-dimensional unit with a size of a predetermined frequency resource and a predetermined time resource. For example, it may be defined as 1 ms unit as a time resource and 12 subcarriers (1 carrier x 15 kHz = 180 kHz) as a frequency resource. In the above, when the synchronization is completed, the terminal checks the master system information block (MIB) or minimum system information (MSI) to check the control resource set (CORESEST) information and the initial access bandwidth part (BWP) information It can be checked (1e-15, 1e-20). In the above, the CORESET information refers to the location of time/frequency transmission resources through which control signals are transmitted from the base station, and indicates, for example, the location of resources through which a PDCCH channel is transmitted. That is, the CORESET information is information indicating where the first system information (system information block 1, SIB1) is transmitted, and indicates in which frequency/time resource the PDCCH is transmitted. In the above, when the terminal reads the first system information, it can check the information on the initial partial bandwidth (initial BWP). As described above, when the UE completes synchronization of the downlink signal with the base station and can receive a control signal, the UE performs a random access procedure in the initial partial bandwidth (initial BWP) of a cell camped on, and establishes an RRC connection. It is possible to perform RRC connection establishment by requesting and receiving an RRC message.

In the RRC connection configuration, a plurality of partial bandwidths may be configured for each cell (Pcell or Pscell or Spcell or Scell). A plurality of partial bandwidths may be set for downlink within the one cell, and a plurality of partial bandwidths may be separately set for uplink.

The plurality of partial bandwidths include an initial partial bandwidth (initial BWP), a default partial bandwidth (default BWP), a first active partial bandwidth (first active BWP), a dormant partial bandwidth (dormant BWP), or a first active partial bandwidth activated from dormancy (first active BWP). It may be indicated and configured as a partial bandwidth identifier (BWP Identifier) so that it can be used as active BWP from dormant.

In the above, the initial partial bandwidth (initial BWP) may be used as a partial bandwidth determined on a cell-specific basis, which exists one by one for each cell, and a terminal accessing the cell for the first time connects to the cell through a random access procedure. It can be used as a partial bandwidth in which a terminal that has established or established a connection can perform synchronization. In addition, the base station may set an initial downlink partial bandwidth (initial downlink BWP) to be used in downlink and an initial uplink partial bandwidth (initial uplink BWP) to be used in uplink for each cell. In addition, the configuration information for the initial partial bandwidth may be broadcast in the first system information (system information 1, SIB1) indicated by CORESET, and the base station may re-configure the connection to the terminal through an RRC message. In addition, the initial partial bandwidth may be designated and used as number 0 of the partial bandwidth identifier in uplink and downlink, respectively. That is, all terminals accessing the same cell can equally designate and use the same initial partial bandwidth as partial bandwidth identifier 0. This is because when performing a random access procedure, the base station can transmit a random access response (RAR) message in an initial partial bandwidth that can be read by all terminals, so there may be an advantage in facilitating the contention-based random access procedure. .

In the above, the first active partial bandwidth (first active BWP) may be set differently for each UE, and may be indicated by designating a partial bandwidth identifier among a plurality of partial bandwidths. The first active partial bandwidth may be set for downlink and uplink, respectively, as a first active downlink partial bandwidth (first active downlink BWP) and a first active uplink partial bandwidth (first active uplink BWP) as partial bandwidth identifiers, respectively. can be set. The initially activated partial bandwidth may be used to indicate which partial bandwidth is to be initially activated and used when a plurality of partial bandwidths are set in one cell. For example, when a Pcell or Pscell and a plurality of Scells are configured for a UE and a plurality of partial bandwidths are configured for each Pcell or Pscell or Scell, if the Pcell or Pscell or Scell is activated, the UE is configured to the Pcell or Pscell or Scell. Among a plurality of partial bandwidths set in , a first active partial bandwidth (first active BWP) can be activated and used. That is, a first active downlink partial bandwidth (first active downlink BWP) may be activated and used for downlink and a first active uplink partial bandwidth (first active uplink BWP) may be activated and used for uplink.

In the above, the terminal switches the current or activated downlink partial bandwidth for the cell, activates the first active downlink partial bandwidth (or the partial bandwidth set or indicated by the RRC message), or the current or activated uplink portion The operation of switching the bandwidth and activating it with the first active uplink partial bandwidth (or the partial bandwidth set or indicated by the RRC message) is an RRC message or MAC control information or DCI indicating that the cell or partial bandwidth is in an inactive state and then activated. You can do it when you receive it. In addition, it may be performed when an instruction to transition a cell or partial bandwidth to an idle state or an instruction to activate an idle partial bandwidth is received through an RRC message, MAC control information, or DCI. Because when activating the cell or sub-bandwidth, the current or activated downlink sub-bandwidth is switched anyway to activate the initially activated downlink sub-bandwidth (or the sub-bandwidth set or indicated by the RRC message) or the uplink sub-bandwidth is activated. Since it will be activated with the first active uplink partial bandwidth (or the partial bandwidth set or indicated by the RRC message) by switching, even when performing a channel measurement report in the dormant state, for the first active downlink / uplink partial bandwidth, frequency / This is because the base station can effectively use the carrier aggregation technology only when the channel is measured and reported. In the above, the default partial bandwidth (default BWP) may be set differently for each UE (UE specific), and may be indicated by designating a partial bandwidth identifier among a plurality of partial bandwidths. The basic partial bandwidth may be set only for downlink. The basic partial bandwidth may be used as a partial bandwidth to which an activated partial bandwidth among a plurality of downlink partial bandwidths falls back after a predetermined time. For example, a partial bandwidth inactivity timer (bwp inactivity timer) can be set for each cell or each partial bandwidth with an RRC message, and the timer starts or It is restarted or it can be started or restarted when an active partial bandwidth is switched to another partial bandwidth. When the timer expires, the terminal may fall back or switch the downlink partial bandwidth activated in the cell to the basic bandwidth. In the above, switching may refer to a procedure of inactivating a currently activated partial bandwidth and activating a partial bandwidth indicated by switching. downlink control information) In the above, switching can be triggered by indicating a partial bandwidth to be switched or activated, and the partial bandwidth is a partial bandwidth identifier (eg 0 or 1 or 2 or 3 or 4 ) can be indicated.

The reason why the basic partial bandwidth is applied and used only for the downlink is that the base station makes the terminal fall back to the basic partial bandwidth after a certain time for each cell to receive an instruction from the base station (eg, DCI of PDCCH), so that the base station scheduling because it can facilitate For example, if the base station sets the basic partial bandwidth of terminals accessing one cell to the initial partial bandwidth, the base station may continue to perform scheduling instructions only in the initial partial bandwidth after a certain time. If the basic partial bandwidth is not set in the RRC message, the initial partial bandwidth may be regarded as the basic partial bandwidth and fall back to the initial partial bandwidth when the partial band deactivation timer expires.

As another method, in order to increase the implementation freedom of the base station, a basic partial bandwidth can be defined and set for uplink and used as a basic partial bandwidth for downlink.

In the above, the dormant partial bandwidth (dormant BWP) means a partial bandwidth or a dormant partial bandwidth (dormant BWP in activated SCell) that is a dormant mode of an activated cell, or when the dormant partial bandwidth is activated, the terminal transmits data to the base station. Sending/receiving is not possible, or the PDCCH is not monitored to check the base station's instructions, or the pilot signal is not transmitted, but channel measurement is performed and the measurement result for the measured frequency/cell/channel is periodically displayed according to the base station setting. Alternatively, it is characterized in that a report is performed when an event occurs. Therefore, since the terminal does not monitor the PDCCH and does not transmit a pilot signal in the dormant partial bandwidth (dormant BWP) of the activated cell, compared to the normal partial bandwidth (or partial bandwidth other than the dormant partial bandwidth) of the activated cell or It is possible to save battery compared to activating the normal partial bandwidth of the activated cell (or partial bandwidth other than the dormant partial bandwidth), and since the channel measurement report is performed unlike when the cell is deactivated, the base station reports the measurement Transmission delay can be reduced by rapidly activating the normal partial bandwidth of the activated cell based on the base or based on the measurement report of the dormant partial bandwidth of the activated cell so that the carrier aggregation technology can be used quickly.

The first active partial bandwidth (or the first active non-dormant partial bandwidth or the partial bandwidth set or indicated by the RRC message) activated in the dormant state or by being switched from the dormant sub-bandwidth is the dormant partial bandwidth of one activated cell. When operating in partial bandwidth or when the partial bandwidth activated in the activated cell is the dormant partial bandwidth or when the cell switches to the dormant partial bandwidth, the terminal receives a DCI or MAC CE or RRC message of the PDCCH from the base station in the activated cell is instructed to switch the sub-bandwidth of the dormant sub-bandwidth to normal sub-bandwidth (or non-dormant sub-bandwidth), or switch or switch from the dormant sub-bandwidth to the normal sub-bandwidth, or the dormant sub-bandwidth. In the case of instructing to switch or switch from an active partial bandwidth to a normal partial bandwidth (eg, the first active partial bandwidth activated from dormancy) or to activate in the partial bandwidth, according to the instruction, the terminal is currently in the active or active cell. It may be a partial bandwidth to be activated by switching the partial bandwidth or a partial bandwidth to be activated from the dormant state set in the RRC message.

1f shows a procedure for a terminal to switch from an RRC idle mode to an RRC connected mode in a next-generation mobile communication system to which the present disclosure can be applied, bearer configuration information for connection to the terminal, or cell group or It is a diagram illustrating a procedure for setting cell configuration information or channel measurement configuration information.

One cell provided by the base station can serve a very wide frequency band. First, the terminal may search the entire frequency band provided by the operator (PLMN) in units of predetermined resource blocks (eg, in units of 12 resource blocks (RBs)). That is, the UE may start to search for a primary synchronization sequence (PSS)/secondary synchronization sequence (SSS) in the resource block unit in the entire system bandwidth. If the signals are detected while searching for the PSS/SSS in units of the resource block, the signals can be read and interpreted (decoded) to determine the boundary between a subframe and a radio transmission resource frame. In the above, when the synchronization is completed, the terminal can read system information of the cell currently camped on. That is, it is possible to check master system information block (MIB) or minimum system information (MSI) to check control resource set (CORESEST) information and read system information to check initial bandwidth part (BWP) information. (1f-01, 1f-05). In the above, the CORESET information refers to the location of time/frequency transmission resources through which control signals are transmitted from the base station, and indicates, for example, the location of resources through which a PDCCH channel is transmitted.

As described above, when the terminal completes synchronization of the downlink signal with the base station and can receive a control signal, the terminal performs a random access procedure in the initial partial bandwidth, receives a random access response, requests RRC connection establishment, , RRC connection can be established by receiving an RRC message (1f-10, 1f-15, 1f-20, 1f-25, 1f-30).

When the basic RRC connection configuration is completed in the above, the base station may send an RRC message asking the UE about the capability of the UE in order to check the capability of the UE (UECapabilityEnquiry, 1f-35). As another method, the base station may inquire about the capabilities of the UE to the MME or AMF in order to check the capabilities of the UE. This is because the MME or AMF may have stored the capability information of the UE if it has previously accessed the UE. If there is no UE capability information desired by the BS, the BS may request UE capability from the UE. In the above, when the UE reports the UE capability, whether the UE supports the idle partial bandwidth for the SCell of each cell group (master cell group or secondary cell group) or the first or second embodiment of the present disclosure or Whether the third embodiment or the fourth embodiment is supported, or whether dormant partial bandwidth is supported for PSCells in each cell group, or whether cell group suspension or resume procedures are supported for PSCells in each cell group; or The number of supported cell groups, etc. may be reported to the base station as a terminal capability. In addition, in the above, the UE determines whether configuration information of the SCell of the master cell group, the SCell of the secondary cell group, or the PSCell of the secondary cell group can be stored and restored or discarded in the RRCResume message in the RRC connection resume procedure. Alternatively, whether or not it can be partially reset or whether it can be activated may be reported to the base station as a terminal capability.

The reason why the base station sends an RRC message to the terminal to check the performance of the terminal is to check the performance of the terminal, for example, how much frequency band the terminal can read or the range of the frequency band that can be read can figure out After confirming the performance of the terminal, an appropriate partial bandwidth (BWP) may be set for the terminal. When the terminal receives the RRC message asking for the performance of the terminal, in response to this, the terminal indicates the range of bandwidth supported by the terminal or the range of bandwidth supported from the current system bandwidth as an offset from the reference center frequency, or Alternatively, the start and end points of the supported frequency bandwidth may be directly indicated, or the center frequency and bandwidth may be indicated (1f-40).

In the above, the partial bandwidth may be set by an RRCSetup message of RRC connection setup, an RRCResume message (1f-25), or an RRCReconfiguration message (1f-45, 1f-70), and the RRC message is for PCell or Pscell or a plurality of cells. Configuration information may be included, and a plurality of partial bandwidths may be set for each cell (PCell, Pscell, or Scell). When a plurality of partial bandwidths are set for each cell, a plurality of partial bandwidths to be used in the downlink of each cell may be set. A plurality of partial bandwidths to be used can be set. In the case of a TDD system, a plurality of partial bandwidths to be commonly used in downlink and uplink of each cell may be set.

The cell configuration information or information for partial bandwidth configuration of each cell (PCell, Pscell, or Scell) may include some of the following information.

- Cell identifier (SCell index)

- Cell setting information

■ 1st channel measurement setting information for each cell or partial bandwidth

■ 2nd channel measurement setting information for each cell or partial bandwidth

- Downlink partial bandwidth setting information of the cell

■ Initial downlink partial bandwidth (initial downlink BWP) setting information

■ Multiple partial bandwidth setting information and partial bandwidth identifier (BWP ID) corresponding to each partial bandwidth

■ Initial state setting information (eg, active state or dormant state or inactive state) of the cell or downlink partial bandwidth

■ A partial bandwidth identifier indicating the first active downlink partial bandwidth (BWP)

■ Sub-bandwidth identifier indicating the default sub-bandwidth (default BWP)

■ Setting information for PDCCH monitoring for each sub-bandwidth. For example, CORESET information, search space resource information, or PDCCH transmission resource, period, subframe number information, etc.

■ Sub-bandwidth identifier indicating the dormant sub-bandwidth

■ Partial bandwidth identifier indicating the first active partial bandwidth to activate from sleep

■ Partial Bandwidth Disable Timer Settings and Timer Values

■ 1st channel measurement setting information for each cell or partial bandwidth

■ 2nd channel measurement setting information for each cell or partial bandwidth

- Uplink partial bandwidth setting information of the cell

■ Initial uplink partial bandwidth (initial uplink BWP) setting information

■ Multiple partial bandwidth setting information and partial bandwidth identifier (BWP ID) corresponding to each partial bandwidth

■ Initial state setting information (eg, active state or dormant state or inactive state) of the cell or downlink partial bandwidth

■ A partial bandwidth identifier indicating the first active uplink partial bandwidth (BWP)

- Configuration information (for example, PUCCH transmission resource information of PCell or PUCCH SCell or PSCell) for performing channel measurement in a dormant partial bandwidth or a partial bandwidth other than the dormant partial bandwidth and reporting the measurement result

The first channel measurement configuration information that can be included in the RRC message (RRCReconfiguration or RRCResume) and set includes configuration information of a cell (eg, PCell, PSCell, or SCell) of the cell group in order to quickly activate the cell group. Frequent channel measurement signals (eg, Radios resource or Reference Signal or TRS (temporary reference signal) or SSB) so that the base station can temporarily or frequently transmit channel measurement signals so that channel measurement can be performed quickly in the cell. (synchronization signal block) or CSI-RS (channel state information reference signal) or RS (reference signal) period or transmitted transmission resource information (frequency or time transmission resource at which the frequent channel measurement signal is transmitted) or interval or Number of times (number of times the frequent channel measurement signal is transmitted) or timer value (time during which the frequent channel measurement signal is transmitted) or time interval (interval in which the frequent channel measurement signal is transmitted (eg, time unit (slot or subframe)) or symbol, etc.) or configuration information such as transmission resources or period or interval or timing or offset for which the UE should report the measurement result. In the above, the first channel measurement configuration information The reporting period (or transmission resource) at which the terminal can report the channel measurement result may be set to be short, or the base station may set many signals for channel measurement (or transmission resources or ( For example, it may be characterized in that a transmission resource for channel measurement can be set so that a base station can transmit a radio resource, a reference signal, or a temporary reference signal (TRS) a lot or frequently. In the above, the first channel measurement configuration information may include configuration information for a signal for channel measurement for a specific terminal (or terminals) in the cell or partial bandwidth of the base station. For example, the period of the signal for measuring the channel or the number of signals transmitted, the period during which the signal is transmitted or the offset for the time during which the signal is transmitted or the length of time between signals to be transmitted or a plurality of channels that can be transmitted A list of signals or a time transmission resource (or frequency transmission resource) indicating the location of a signal to be transmitted, or a transmission resource (time transmission resource or frequency transmission resource) for reporting measurement results, or a period for reporting measurement results, etc. can include In addition, the first channel measurement configuration information may be set differently for each cell or for each partial bandwidth for a plurality of cells or partial bandwidths configured in the RRC message, and the terminal easily measures transmission resources for measuring a channel. To support this, beam-related setting information (transmission configuration indication (TCI) state or quasi co-location (QCL)) such as beam direction, beam number, or beam position may be set together. In addition, the first channel measurement setting information includes a timing advance (TA) value (or offset value) for synchronizing the downlink signal of the base station or the uplink signal of the base station, or a timer indicating the validity of the TA value (TAT, time alignment timer) or timer value (TAT value) to correctly perform channel measurement or channel measurement report. In addition, the first channel measurement configuration information set as the RRC message may include a plurality of signal information for channel measurement, and any one of the plurality of channel measurement signal information set above as an RRC message or MAC CE or DCI By instructing one channel measurement signal information or beam configuration information, the terminal may perform channel measurement or channel measurement report by applying or using the indicated channel measurement signal information or beam configuration information. The method indicated above may define a mapping between a bitmap, index, or identifier and signal information for measurement of each channel set above, and may indicate the mapping based on this. In another method, by setting or instructing signal information for channel measurement with the RRC message or MAC CE, the terminal performs channel measurement by applying or using the set (or indicated) signal information for channel measurement, or A channel measurement report may be performed.

The first channel measurement configuration information proposed in the present disclosure may be initially deactivated when configured as an RRC message or after handover, and later MAC control information or PDCCH DCI proposed in the present disclosure It can be activated by information or RRC message. When the RRC message is configured as described above, the base station can easily manage the cell state or the channel measurement procedure of the UE only when the initial state is inactive, and the UE can measure when and how the channel is measured without processing delay of the RRC message. The timing of what to do can also be done accurately.

In addition, the second channel measurement configuration information may be included or configured in the RRC message (RRCReconfiguration or RRCResume). The second channel measurement setting information may include general channel measurement setting information such as transmission resource or period or time interval or number of times of a signal for channel measurement or transmission resource or period or time interval for channel measurement report.

The initial partial bandwidth (initial BWP), default partial bandwidth (default BWP), or first active partial bandwidth (first active BWP) set above can be used for the following purposes, and can operate as follows to suit the purpose. .

In the above, the initial partial bandwidth (initial BWP) may be used as a partial bandwidth determined on a cell-specific basis, which exists one by one for each cell, and a terminal accessing the cell for the first time connects to the cell through a random access procedure. It can be used as a partial bandwidth in which a terminal that has established or established a connection can perform synchronization. In addition, the base station may set an initial downlink partial bandwidth (initial downlink BWP) to be used in downlink and an initial uplink partial bandwidth (initial uplink BWP) to be used in uplink for each cell. In addition, the configuration information for the initial partial bandwidth may be broadcast in the first system information (system information 1, SIB1) indicated by CORESET, and the base station may re-configure the connection to the terminal through an RRC message. In addition, the initial partial bandwidth may be designated and used as number 0 of the partial bandwidth identifier in uplink and downlink, respectively. That is, all terminals accessing the same cell can equally designate and use the same initial partial bandwidth as partial bandwidth identifier 0. This is because when performing a random access procedure, the base station can transmit a random access response (RAR) message in an initial partial bandwidth that can be read by all terminals, so there may be an advantage in facilitating the contention-based random access procedure. .

In the above, the first active partial bandwidth (first active BWP) may be set differently for each UE, and may be indicated by designating a partial bandwidth identifier among a plurality of partial bandwidths. The first active partial bandwidth may be set for downlink and uplink, respectively, as a first active downlink partial bandwidth (first active downlink BWP) and a first active uplink partial bandwidth (first active uplink BWP) as partial bandwidth identifiers, respectively. can be set. The initially activated partial bandwidth may be used to indicate which partial bandwidth is to be initially activated and used when a plurality of partial bandwidths are set in one cell. For example, when a Pcell or Pscell and a plurality of Scells are configured for a UE and a plurality of partial bandwidths are configured for each Pcell or Pscell or Scell, if the Pcell or Pscell or Scell is activated, the UE is configured to the Pcell or Pscell or Scell. Among a plurality of partial bandwidths set in , a first active partial bandwidth (first active BWP) can be activated and used. That is, a first active downlink partial bandwidth (first active downlink BWP) may be activated and used for downlink and a first active uplink partial bandwidth (first active uplink BWP) may be activated and used for uplink.

The terminal switches the current or activated downlink partial bandwidth for the cell, activates it to the first active downlink partial bandwidth (or the partial bandwidth set or indicated by the RRC message), or switches the current or activated uplink partial bandwidth The operation of activating the initially activated uplink partial bandwidth (or the partial bandwidth set or indicated by the RRC message) may be performed when a cell or a partial bandwidth of an activated cell is instructed to activate after being in an inactive or dormant state, or It can be performed when an instruction to switch from a deactivated or dormant sub-bandwidth to a normal sub-bandwidth or to activate is received through an RRC message, MAC control information, or DCI of the PDCCH. In addition, when the terminal receives an instruction to transition an activated cell or partial bandwidth to an idle state, or an instruction to switch to or activate an activated cell or partial bandwidth in an RRC message, MAC control information, or DCI of a PDCCH, the partial bandwidth is converted to an idle partial bandwidth You can switch to or activate or dormant a partial bandwidth.

In the above, dormancy, switching to a dormant partial bandwidth, or activation of a dormant partial bandwidth may mean performing an operation proposed in the dormant state in the present disclosure. That is, an operation of measuring a channel for a downlink partial bandwidth (or idle partial bandwidth) and reporting the result to the base station may be performed without performing PDCCH monitoring. Alternatively, when activating or switching the activated cell or sub-bandwidth to the general sub-bandwidth, the downlink sub-bandwidth is switched anyway to activate the initially active downlink sub-bandwidth, and the uplink sub-bandwidth is switched to initially activate the uplink. Since it is to be activated with a partial bandwidth, the dormant partial bandwidth may be set to the first active downlink or uplink partial bandwidth or the basic partial bandwidth. In the above, the default partial bandwidth (default BWP) may be set differently for each UE (UE specific), and may be indicated by designating a partial bandwidth identifier among a plurality of partial bandwidths. The basic partial bandwidth may be set only for downlink. The basic partial bandwidth may be used as a partial bandwidth to which an activated partial bandwidth among a plurality of downlink partial bandwidths falls back after a predetermined time. For example, a partial bandwidth inactivity timer (bwp inactivity timer) can be set for each cell or each partial bandwidth with an RRC message, and the timer starts or restarts when data transmission/reception occurs in an activated partial bandwidth rather than the default partial bandwidth. or can be started or restarted when an active sub-bandwidth is switched to another sub-bandwidth. When the timer expires, the terminal may fall back or switch the downlink partial bandwidth activated in the cell to the basic bandwidth. In the above, switching may refer to a procedure of inactivating a currently activated partial bandwidth and activating a partial bandwidth indicated by switching. Downlink Control Information) In the above, switching can be triggered by indicating a partial bandwidth to be switched or activated, and the partial bandwidth is a partial bandwidth identifier (eg, 0 or 1 or 2 or 3 or 4) can be indicated.

The reason why the basic partial bandwidth is applied and used only for the downlink is that the base station makes the terminal fall back to the basic partial bandwidth after a certain time for each cell to receive an instruction from the base station (eg, DCI of PDCCH), so that the base station scheduling because it can facilitate For example, if the base station sets the basic partial bandwidth of terminals accessing one cell to the initial partial bandwidth, the base station may continue to perform scheduling instructions only in the initial partial bandwidth after a predetermined time. If the basic partial bandwidth is not set in the RRC message, the initial partial bandwidth may be regarded as the basic partial bandwidth and fall back to the initial partial bandwidth when the partial band deactivation timer expires.

As another method, in order to increase the implementation freedom of the base station, a basic partial bandwidth can be defined and set for uplink and used as a basic partial bandwidth for downlink.

In the above, the dormant partial bandwidth (dormant BWP) means a partial bandwidth or a dormant partial bandwidth (dormant BWP in activated SCell) that is a dormant mode of an activated cell, or when the dormant partial bandwidth is activated, the terminal transmits data to the base station. Sending/receiving is not possible, or the PDCCH is not monitored to check the base station's instructions, or the pilot signal is not transmitted, but channel measurement is performed and the measurement result for the measured frequency/cell/channel is periodically displayed according to the base station setting. Alternatively, it is characterized in that a report is performed when an event occurs. Therefore, since the terminal does not monitor the PDCCH and does not transmit a pilot signal in the dormant partial bandwidth (dormant BWP) of the activated cell, compared to the normal partial bandwidth (or partial bandwidth other than the dormant partial bandwidth) of the activated cell or active It is possible to save battery compared to activating the general partial bandwidth (or partial bandwidth rather than the dormant partial bandwidth) of a cell that has been disabled, and since the channel measurement report is performed unlike when the cell is deactivated, the base station can perform a measurement report based on the measurement report. Alternatively, transmission delay can be reduced by rapidly activating the general partial bandwidth of the activated cell based on the measurement report of the dormant partial bandwidth of the activated cell so that the carrier aggregation technology can be used quickly.

In the above, the first activation partial bandwidth (or first activation non-dormant partial bandwidth) activated from dormancy is when the terminal is operating the partial bandwidth of one activated cell as the dormant partial bandwidth or the partial bandwidth activated in the activated cell is dormant. In the case of partial bandwidth or when the cell switches to the dormant sub-bandwidth, the UE converts the partial bandwidth of the activated cell from the dormant sub-bandwidth to the normal sub-bandwidth (or, if the dormant sub-bandwidth is active sub-bandwidth); When an instruction is instructed to switch or switch to or activate the first active partial bandwidth), the partial bandwidth for which the terminal needs to switch or activate the partial bandwidth of the activated cell according to the instruction is activated from dormancy set in the RRC message It may be the first activation partial bandwidth.

In the present disclosure, the meaning of switching a first partial bandwidth to a second partial bandwidth can be interpreted as meaning that the second partial bandwidth is activated, or the activated first partial bandwidth is deactivated and the second partial bandwidth is activated. It can be interpreted as meaning activating a bandwidth.

In addition, in the RRCSetup message, RRCResume message (1f-25) or RRCReconfiguration message (1f-45) of the RRC connection setup above, even if the terminal does not receive an RRC message or MAC control information from the base station or an indication due to the DCI of the PDCCH, the terminal A state transition timer can be set so that the state transition can be performed by itself. For example, a cell deactivation timer (ScellDeactivationTimer) may be set for each cell, and the cell may transition to a deactivated state when the cell deactivation timer expires.

In addition, in the RRCSetup message, RRCResume message (1f-25) or RRCReconfiguration message (1f-45) of the RRC connection setup above, frequency measurement configuration information (measurement configuration) and frequency measurement gap configuration information (measurement gap information) are set. and may include frequency measurement object information. In addition, in the RRCSetup message, RRCResume message (1f-25) or RRCReconfiguration message (1f-45) of the RRC connection setup above, a function for reducing power consumption of the terminal (power saving mode) can be set, and the power saving mode can be set. In addition to the function for DRX (Discontinuous Reception) cycle or offset or on-duration interval (the interval in which the UE must monitor the PDCCH) or configuration information such as time information or when before the on-duration interval in the DRX cycle, the base station Whether to monitor or detect the PDCCH, time information or short time period information may be set. If the function for reducing the power consumption of the terminal is set in the above, the terminal can set a DRX cycle and detect a WUS (Wake-Up Signal) signal in a section set to monitor the PDCCH of the base station before the on-duration section, , The base station may instruct the terminal whether to skip (or not perform) or perform PDCCH monitoring in the on-duration section immediately following the DCI of the PDCCH of the WUS signal. The UE always needs to monitor the PDCCH in the on-duration interval, but the base station instructs the UE not to monitor the PDCCH in the on-duration interval with the WUS signal as described above, so that battery consumption of the UE can be saved.

When the RRC connection configuration is completed as described above, the UE can configure a plurality of partial bandwidths according to an instruction set in an RRC message. In addition, one or a small number of bandwidths among the set plurality of partial bandwidths may be activated in order to save battery power. For example, one partial bandwidth to be activated can be indicated. And the base station instructs activation of the partial bandwidth with an RRC message or MAC control information (MAC CE) or L1 signaling (PHY layer control signal such as DCI of PDCCH) to switch from the initial access partial bandwidth to a new partial bandwidth can be instructed to do. As another method, new bitmap information may be defined in the DCI of the PDCCH, and whether to activate a normal partial bandwidth (or a partial bandwidth other than the idle partial bandwidth), activate the idle partial bandwidth, or deactivate the partial bandwidth may be indicated. Alternatively, whether to activate the normal sub-bandwidth (for example, the first active sub-bandwidth to be activated from dormancy) with the bitmap, or activate the dormant sub-bandwidth or switch to the dormant sub-bandwidth or switch the sub-bandwidth You can instruct what to do. Since there may be many other newly accessed users in the initially accessed partial bandwidth, it may be more advantageous to allocate a new partial bandwidth and separately manage the connected users in terms of scheduling. This is because the initial access partial bandwidth is not set for each terminal but can be commonly shared and used by all terminals. In addition, in order to reduce signaling overhead, a default partial bandwidth may be dynamically indicated by the MAC control information, L1 signaling, or system information.

In the above, configuration information for a cell group may also be included in the RRC message (RRCSetup message or RRCResume message (1f-25) or RRCReconfiguration message (1f-70)). The configuration information for the cell group may include some or a plurality of pieces of the following information, or may indicate a state or procedure for each cell group or application or release of configuration information.

- Cell group identifier indicating the cell group (eg, Cell Group identifier or Index)

- an indicator indicating the state of the cell group (eg active state or suspended state or inactive state)

- An indicator indicating the state of a cell group (eg, an indicator to suspend (or deactivate) a cell group (eg, Cellgroup (SCG) suspension indicator) or an indicator to resume (or activate) a cell group (eg, For example, Cellgroup (resumption indicator (SCG))

- Indicator (eg, SDAP layer device or PDCP layer device or RLC layer device or MAC layer device) triggering a procedure of a corresponding protocol layer device (eg, SDAP layer device or PDCP layer device) according to an indicator indicating the state of the cell group PDCP re-establishment indicator or PDCP data recovery indicator or indicator triggering a new procedure or RLC re-establishment indicator or MAC layer device initialization indicator or MAC layer device partial initialization indicator)

- When an indicator to stop (or deactivate) the state of the cell group is included, second DRX configuration information (eg, monitoring It is possible to set the period or activation period (on duration length or period or offset, etc.). For example, when the UE receives the indicator to stop the cell group, the UE can save UE power by performing PDCCH monitoring based on a very long period by applying the second DRX configuration information. As another method, when the terminal receives the indicator for stopping the cell group, the terminal activates the downlink partial bandwidth of the PSCell of the cell group as an idle partial bandwidth by applying partial bandwidth configuration information for the PSCell of the cell group, Alternatively, the UE may perform switching and UE operation in a cell in which the dormant partial bandwidth proposed in the present disclosure is activated. In addition, when the UE receives the indicator to stop the cell group, it can deactivate all SCells configured in the cell group. As another method, when the terminal receives the indicator to stop the cell group, the terminal activates or switches the downlink partial bandwidth to the dormant partial bandwidth for the SCell for which the dormant partial bandwidth is set among the SCells configured in the cell group, , UE operation can be performed in a cell in which the dormant bandwidth proposed in the present disclosure is activated, or the SCell in which the dormant bandwidth is not set can be deactivated. As another method, when the terminal receives an indicator to stop the cell group in the RRC message, the terminal activates, deactivates, or puts each SCell into dormancy according to configuration information or indicators for each SCell of the cell group included in the RRC message. Dormantization partial bandwidth activation may be performed, or before or after receiving an indicator to suspend the cell group by a PDCCH indicator (eg, bitmap), MAC control information, or an RRC message, the cell group Each SCell of may be activated or deactivated or dormant or dormant partial bandwidth activation may be performed.

- Configuration information (for example, PUCCH transmission resource information of PCell or PUCCH SCell or PSCell) for performing channel measurement in a dormant partial bandwidth or a partial bandwidth other than the dormant partial bandwidth and reporting the measurement result

- When an indicator to resume (or activate) the state of a cell group is included, first DRX configuration information (eg, monitoring period or activation period) enabling PDCCH monitoring to be performed again in the PSCell of the cell group (on duration) length or period or offset) can be set. Alternatively, the first DRX configuration information stored for the cell group may be restored and applied. For example, upon receiving the indicator for resuming the cell group, the terminal may resume data transmission or reception by performing PDCCH monitoring by applying the first DRX configuration information stored or received from the RRC message. As another method, when the terminal receives the indicator for resuming the cell group, the terminal applies partial bandwidth configuration information for the PSCell of the cell group to set the downlink partial bandwidth of the PSCell of the cell group to a portion other than the dormant partial bandwidth. Activate or switch to a bandwidth (eg, a partial bandwidth set by an RRC message), and perform a UE operation in a cell in which the general partial bandwidth (partial bandwidth other than the idle partial bandwidth) proposed in the present disclosure is activated there is. Alternatively, when the terminal receives the indicator for resuming the cell group, the random access configuration information stored or received from the RRC message (random access transmission resource information (time or frequency transmission resource) for preamble transmission or designated preamble information, etc. ) may be applied to trigger a random access procedure in the PSCell of the cell group. As another method, when the terminal receives the indicator to resume the cell group, the random access configuration information (random access transmission resource information (time or frequency transmission resource) for preamble transmission or designated preamble information, etc., is sent to the RRC message). ) is included, a random access procedure (eg, contention-free random access) may be triggered in a PSCell of the cell group by applying the random access configuration information. If the RRC message indicating resumption or activation does not include random access configuration information (random access transmission resource information (time or frequency transmission resource) for preamble transmission or designated preamble information, etc.), random access in the PSCell of the cell group A procedure (eg, contention-based random access) may be triggered or a contention-based random access or 2-step random access may be triggered based on system information. In the above, if there is random access configuration information (random access transmission resource information (time or frequency transmission resource) for preamble transmission or designated preamble information, etc.) stored in the terminal before receiving the indicator to resume the cell group, release. Alternatively, the UE may perform PDCCH monitoring in the cell group or cell indicated or configured above, and may trigger and perform a random access procedure as indicated by the PDCCH.

- When the above indicator to resume (or activate) the state of the cell group is included, or when the UE receives the above indicator to resume the cell group, it can activate all SCells configured in the cell group. As another method, when the terminal receives the indicator for resuming the cell group, the downlink partial bandwidth for the SCells for which the dormant partial bandwidth is set among the SCells configured in the cell group is set as a partial bandwidth other than the dormant partial bandwidth (e.g. For example, a partial bandwidth set by an RRC message or an initially activated partial bandwidth) may be activated or switched, and the terminal may operate in a cell in which a partial bandwidth other than the dormant partial bandwidth proposed in the present disclosure is activated, or dormant. SCells for which partial bandwidth is not configured can be activated. In another method, when the terminal receives an indicator for resuming a cell group in the RRC message, each SCell is activated, deactivated, or dormant according to configuration information or an indicator for each SCell of the cell group included in the RRC message. Dormantization partial bandwidth activation may be performed, or before or after receiving an indicator to resume the cell group, by a PDCCH indicator (eg, bitmap), MAC control information, or an RRC message, the cell group Each SCell of may be activated or deactivated or dormant or dormant partial bandwidth activation may be performed.

- directive to add cell group settings

- Directive to disable cell group settings

-Security setting information (security key information or security key information for cell groups or additional information (eg, sk-counter)

-Indicator indicating handover or cell group addition or cell group change (eg, ReconfigurationWithSync indicator or mobilitycontrolInfo indicator)

- First channel measurement setting information for each cell or partial bandwidth

-Secondary channel measurement setting information for each cell or partial bandwidth

- An indicator for adding cell group settings or an indicator for changing cell groups (ReconfigurationWithSync) or an indicator for random access procedures (ReconfigurationWithSync or a newly defined indicator)

- An indicator instructing whether to activate the cell group by performing a random access procedure when activating a cell group or activating a cell group without a random access procedure (ReconfigurationWithSync or a newly defined indicator)

- RRM (radio resource management) setting information or frequency measurement setting information or separate RRM (radio resource management) setting information or frequency measurement setting information to be applied or performed when a cell group is deactivated (eg, battery saving Simplified frequency measurement setting information (Reduced or Relaxed RRM setting information)

- Configuration information for radio link monitoring (RLM) or configuration information for RLM to be applied or performed when a cell group is deactivated. For example, when a cell group is deactivated, configuration information of beams in units of cells to be measured by the terminal or configuration information of beams for each partial bandwidth, and beam-related configuration information (transmission configuration indication (TCI) state or quasi co-location (QCL)) May include or a timing advance (TA) value (or offset value) for synchronizing the downlink signal of the base station or the uplink signal of the base station or a timer indicating the validity of the TA value (TAT, time alignment timer ) or timer value (TAT value), or SSB (synchronization signal block) setting information or CSI-RS (channel state information reference signal) setting information or RS (reference signal) setting information or When a beam failure occurs, transmission resource information (eg, PUCCH configuration information (eg, SR (scheduling request) information or specific transmission resources) or frequency transmission resources or time transmission resources) capable of reporting the result may be included. can In addition, the setting information may include partial bandwidth setting information indicating in which partial bandwidth the RLM procedure is to be performed (for example, it may be indicated by a partial bandwidth identifier). As another method, when the cell group state is inactive, the terminal performs the RLM procedure in the first active partial bandwidth (or first active downlink partial bandwidth, firstActiveDownlinkBWP-ID) set in the RRC message to activate the cell group When performing this process, the initial activation partial bandwidth to be activated can be monitored early to minimize the cell group activation delay. As another method, when the cell group state is set to the inactive state (or active state), the UE performs the RLM procedure in the last (or previously) activated partial bandwidth before the cell group state becomes inactive, It is also possible to keep the connection with the cell group continuously (for example, when partial bandwidth setting information indicating which partial bandwidth to perform the RLM procedure is not set) or when activating the cell group, RRC message The activation procedure may be performed in the first active partial bandwidth (or first active downlink partial bandwidth, firstActiveDownlinkBWP-ID) set in If the partial bandwidth-related setting information indicating in which partial bandwidth to perform the RLM procedure is not set when activating the cell group, the RLM procedure may be performed in the last (or previously) activated partial bandwidth. there is. In addition, the setting information may include beam-related setting information (eg, a partial bandwidth identifier, TCI state, or QCL setting information) indicating which beam to perform the RLM procedure on. there is. As another method, when the cell group state is inactive, the terminal performs the RLM procedure in the beam (eg, TCI state or QCL configuration information) set in the RRC message or activates the beam and performs the RLM procedure , when activating a cell group, a beam to be activated may be monitored early to minimize cell group activation delay. As another method, when the cell group state is set to the inactive state (or active state), the terminal performs the RLM procedure on the last (or previously) activated beam before the cell group state becomes inactive, so that the cell group (For example, when beam-related setting information indicating which beam to perform the RLM procedure is not set) or when activating a cell group, the beam set in the RRC message can be used to perform the activation procedure. If beam-related setting information indicating which beam to perform the RLM procedure is not set when activating the cell group, the RLM procedure may be performed on the last (or previously) activated beam.

- Configuration information for a beam failure detection procedure or beam failure detection (BFD) or configuration information for BFD to be applied or performed when a cell group is deactivated. For example, when a cell group is deactivated, configuration information of beams in units of cells to be measured by the UE or configuration information of beams for each partial bandwidth, and beam-related configuration information (transmission configuration indication (TCI) state or quasi co-location (QCL)) ), or a timing advance (TA) value (or offset value) for synchronizing the downlink signal of the base station or the uplink signal of the base station, or a timer (TAT, time alignment timer) indicating the validity of the TA value ) or timer value (TAT value), or SSB (synchronization signal block) setting information or CSI-RS (channel state information reference signal) setting information or RS (reference signal) setting information or When a beam failure occurs, transmission resource information (eg, PUCCH configuration information (eg, SR (scheduling request) information or specific transmission resources) or frequency transmission resources or time transmission resources) capable of reporting the result may be included. can In addition, the setting information may include partial bandwidth setting information (eg, indicated by a partial bandwidth identifier) indicating in which partial bandwidth the beam failure detection procedure is to be performed. As another method, when the cell group state is inactive, the UE performs a beam failure detection procedure in the first active partial bandwidth (or first active downlink partial bandwidth, firstActiveDownlinkBWP-ID) set in the RRC message, so that the cell group When activating the cell group activation delay, it is possible to minimize the cell group activation delay by early monitoring the initial activation partial bandwidth to be activated. As another method, when the cell group state is set to a deactivated state (or activated state), the terminal performs a beam failure detection procedure in the last (or previously) activated partial bandwidth before the cell group state becomes deactivated, It is possible to keep the connection with the cell group continuously (for example, when partial bandwidth setting information indicating which beam failure detection procedure is performed in which partial bandwidth is not set) or when activating the cell group The activation procedure may be performed in the first active partial bandwidth (or the first active downlink partial bandwidth, firstActiveDownlinkBWP-ID) set in the RRC message. If the setting information related to the partial bandwidth indicating is not set, the beam failure detection procedure may be performed in the last (or previously) activated partial bandwidth. Beam-related setting information indicating whether to perform (eg, it may be indicated by a partial bandwidth identifier, TCI state, or QCL setting information) may be included. Alternatively, the cell group state may be inactivated. state, the UE performs the beam failure detection procedure on the beam set in the RRC message (for example, TCI status or QCL configuration information) to monitor the beam to be activated early when activating the cell group, thereby activating the cell group Alternatively, when the cell group state is set to a deactivated state (or activated state), the terminal beams from the last (or previously) activated beam before the cell group state is deactivated. A failure detection procedure may be performed so that the connection state with the cell group is continuously maintained (eg, beam-related setting information indicating which beam to perform the beam failure detection procedure is not set). Alternatively, when activating a cell group, an activation procedure may be performed in a beam set in an RRC message. If beam-related configuration information indicating which beam to perform the beam failure detection procedure is not set when activating a cell group, the beam failure detection procedure is performed on the last (or previously) activated beam. may be

- The message includes a first timer (eg, T304) or a second timer (eg, T310) or a second timer (eg, T310) in order to efficiently perform a dual access technology configuration procedure (or SCG configuration procedure) or handover procedure. A timer of 3 (eg T312) or a 4th timer (eg timer for fallback) may be introduced and set in the message. The timers are suggested to run and apply in a dual access technology setup procedure or handover procedure. In the above, the first timer (eg T304) is a timer for determining whether the dual access technology setting procedure or the handover procedure has been successfully performed, and the second timer (eg T310) is a wireless A timer for determining whether a connection is valid, and a third timer (eg, T312) is an auxiliary timer for determining whether a wireless connection is valid and a timer for triggering a frequency measurement procedure and reporting a frequency measurement result. And the fourth timer (eg, timer for fallback) fails to activate the cell group (or SCG or PSCell) without the random access procedure proposed in the present disclosure (ie, when the timer expires), random access Procedure (a timer introduced to attempt to activate a cell group by performing a fallback procedure with a normal random access procedure (4-step random access procedure or 2-step random access procedure). The fourth timer may be the first timer. And, the first timer may be used as a timer for fallback.

If the RRC message (eg, RRCReconfiguration message) includes an indicator for stopping (or deactivating) a cell group, an indicator instructing handover, cell group addition, or cell group change (eg, ReconfigurationWithSync indicator or mobilitycontrolInfo indicator), but if it includes an indicator for resuming a cell group or configuration information to set, an indicator instructing handover, cell group addition, or cell group change (e.g., ReconfigurationWithSync indicator or mobilitycontrolInfo indicator) We suggest including This is because when resuming a cell group, connection with the corresponding cell group must be performed again, so synchronization must be achieved, system information must be received, or a random access procedure must be performed if necessary. For example, in the case where the base station sets the cell group of the terminal to an inactive state through the RRC message, the cell group addition indicator, the cell group change indicator, the indicator indicating the random access procedure, or the ReconfigurationWithSync indicator cannot be set together. Accordingly, the terminal may not perform an unnecessary synchronization procedure, connection procedure, or random access procedure.

Hereinafter, a dormant partial bandwidth is newly proposed in a next-generation mobile communication system, and a terminal operation in each partial bandwidth when transitioning or switching each partial bandwidth is proposed in detail.

1G is a diagram illustrating a state transition or partial bandwidth switching procedure for each partial bandwidth proposed in the present disclosure.

As shown in FIG. 1G, the partial bandwidth of each cell (eg, SCell or PSCell) of each cell group of the UE may be activated as a normal partial bandwidth (1g-01) or may be activated as a dormant partial bandwidth (1g-01). 02) or may be deactivated (1g-03), and the normal partial bandwidth or the dormant partial bandwidth may be activated or deactivated due to an instruction by configuration information or MAC control information of the RRC message or DCI of the PDCCH.

State transition operation (activation or inactivation or dormancy) for each partial bandwidth of the cell proposed in this disclosure, or activating the general partial bandwidth, or activating the dormant partial bandwidth, or activating the first activated partial bandwidth activated from dormancy, or normal An operation of deactivating the partial bandwidth or the dormant partial bandwidth may be performed due to one of the following instructions or settings.

- When the partial bandwidth state of the cell is set by the RRC message, or if the partial bandwidth of each cell is set by the RRC message and the dormant partial bandwidth is set in the cell, or if the first active partial bandwidth is set to the dormant partial bandwidth, the dormant portion It may be characterized by starting a cell by switching or activating the bandwidth and performing an operation in the dormant partial bandwidth.

- When a cell activation or deactivation or dormant MAC CE is received,

- upon receipt of a MAC CE from normal sub-bandwidth or dormancy to activate or deactivate the first active sub-bandwidth or dormant sub-bandwidth;

- when DCI of the PDCCH to activate or deactivate or switch to the first active partial bandwidth or dormant partial bandwidth is received from the normal partial bandwidth or dormant;

- If the cell dormancy timer is not set for the active cell and the set cell inactivation timer expires,

- If the partial bandwidth dormancy timer is not set for the active partial bandwidth and the set partial bandwidth status inactivity timer (e.g. bwpInactivityTimer) expires,

In addition, a state transition operation or a method for operating a dormant partial bandwidth proposed in the present disclosure may have the following characteristics.

- The Spcell (Pcell or Pscell) (or downlink partial bandwidth or uplink partial bandwidth of the cell) is characterized in that a dormant partial bandwidth cannot be set, and only a general partial bandwidth is set and always activated. Since the Spcell is synchronized and the main control signals are transmitted and received, it must be kept active at all times because the connection with the base station is lost when the partial bandwidth of the Spcell is dormant or deactivated, or when operated in the dormant partial bandwidth.

- Although it is a partial bandwidth of Scell or SCell, if PUCCH is configured, it is characterized in that a dormant state or a dormant partial bandwidth cannot be set. Since there may be other cells that need to send feedback such as HARQ ACK/NACK through PUCCH, an active state or a general partial bandwidth must be activated and used.

- Due to the above characteristics, the cell deactivation timer (ScellDeactivationTimer) or the partial bandwidth dormancy timer is not applied to the Spcell or the partial bandwidth of the Spcell and the Scell or the partial bandwidth of the SCell to which the PUCCH is set, and can be driven only for other Scells. .

- The cell or partial bandwidth dormancy timer (ScellHibernationTimer) has priority over the cell or partial bandwidth state deactivation timer (ScellDeactivationTimer). In addition, if one timer value is set in the RRC message, the same value may be applied to all cells. As another method, the base station may provide different timer values for each Scell or each BWP in consideration of the characteristics of each Scell or BWP.

- The cell or partial bandwidth may be characterized in that it initially operates in an inactive state unless activated or dormant is indicated in the RRC message.

In the present disclosure, uplink may indicate an uplink partial bandwidth, and downlink may indicate a downlink partial bandwidth. This is because only one activated or dormant partial bandwidth can be operated for each uplink or downlink.

The present disclosure is characterized in that it operates in an active state, inactive state, or dormant state, and when a cell or partial bandwidth performs transition or switching, it is performed in units of partial bandwidth, and when state transition or switching occurs in units of partial bandwidth The partial bandwidth for which state transition or switching is instructed (downlink partial bandwidth or uplink partial bandwidth) is characterized in that state transition or switching is performed according to the state transition or switching instruction. For example, when a partial bandwidth (downlink or uplink partial bandwidth) transitions from the active state to the dormant state, or switching to (or activating) the dormant partial bandwidth, transitioning to the dormant state with the partial bandwidth, or Alternatively, it can be switched (or activated) to the dormant sub-bandwidth.

In the present disclosure, partial bandwidth switching (BWP switching) means that when partial bandwidth switching is indicated by DCI of a PDCCH, when switching is instructed with a partial bandwidth identifier while allocating downlink assignment, the downlink partial bandwidth is the partial bandwidth indicated by the partial bandwidth identifier. , and when instructing partial bandwidth switching with the DCI of the PDCCH, if switching is instructed with the partial bandwidth identifier while allocating the UL grant, the uplink partial bandwidth is switched to the partial bandwidth indicated by the partial bandwidth identifier. In addition, since the DCI format of the PDCCH itself has a different format (format1) for downlink assignment and a format (format0) for UL grant, UE operation can be performed according to the DCI format even if uplink and downlink are not separately described.

The method of operating state transition in a partial bandwidth part level and the operation of partial bandwidth according to each state proposed above of the present disclosure may be extended and applied to various embodiments. In the following of the present disclosure, specific embodiments for extending and applying the contents proposed in the present disclosure will be described.

1H is a diagram illustrating a discontinuous reception (DRX) setting or DRX operation method that can save a battery of a terminal proposed in the present disclosure.

In FIG. 1H, the base station may set a DRX function such as a DRX cycle, starting point, offset, or on-duration (active time) to the PCell, SCell, or PSCell in an RRC message as shown in FIG. 1F to the UE. In the present disclosure, setting the DRX function to PCell, SpCell, or PSCell is considered.

As described above, when the DRX function is configured in the PCell (or SpCell or PSCell), the UE can apply the DRX function in consideration of the DRX cycle (1h-03) and the DRX start time or offset. When the DRX function is applied above, the UE can monitor the PDCCH that can be received from the base station in the PCell or the DCI of the PDCCH only in the active time interval (on-duration or active time, 1h-01) of DRX. In addition, battery consumption of the terminal can be reduced by preventing the terminal from monitoring the PDCCH or DCI of the PDCCH outside the active time period of the DRX function (outside active time, 1h-02).

In FIG. 1F, the base station may set a power saving mode to the terminal through an RRC message in order to further improve battery consumption reduction of the terminal. If the power saving function is set together with the DRX function, the UE activates the PDCCH during a short time interval (1h-04) set to RRC before the active time (active time, 1h-01) in which the UE needs to monitor the PDCCH in the DRX function. It monitors outside the interval, and monitors and receives a Wake Up Signal (WUS) signal outside the activation time interval. With the DCI bit of the PDCCH of the WUS signal, the base station can indicate whether the terminal needs to perform PDCCH monitoring or not to perform PDCCH monitoring at the next activation time (1h-05, 1h-07).

That is, the terminal configured with the power saving function or the DRX function in the above monitors the WUS signal for a short time period (1h-04) set in the RRC message every time before the activation time (1h-05), and if the received WUS signal is activated next If the value of the DCI bit of the PDCCH for the time (1h-05, 1h-07) has 0 (or 1), the UE may indicate that the PDCCH is not monitored during the next activation time (1h-07), or A timer corresponding to the next activation time may be instructed not to run in the MAC layer device so that the UE does not monitor the PDCCH. If the DCI bit value of the PDCCH for the next activation time (1h-05, 1h-07) in the WUS signal received above has a value of 1 (or 0), the UE receives the PDCCH during the next activation time (1h-05). may be instructed to monitor, or the UE may be instructed to monitor the PDCCH by driving a timer corresponding to the next activation time in the MAC layer device.

In addition, in the above, the UE may not monitor the WUS signal or the PDCCH for detecting the WUS signal during the activation time interval.

In addition, when the terminal configured with the power saving function or the DRX function in the above monitors the WUS signal during the short time period (1h-04) set in the RRC message every activation time (1h-05), the first RNTI identifier (eg For example, the signal can be detected by checking the PDCCH with PS-RNTI). The first RNTI identifier (eg, PS-RNTI) may be set to a plurality of terminals, and the base station uses the first RNTI identifier (eg, PS-RNTI) to provide a plurality of terminals with the next In the activation time interval, whether to monitor the PDCCH or not to perform monitoring may be indicated.

In addition, when the terminal configured with the power saving function or the DRX function in the activation time (1h-05) monitors and detects the PDCCH, the second RNTI (eg, C-RNTI) uniquely set as an RRC message to the terminal or A signal may be detected based on the third RNTI (for example, MCS-C-RNTI) or the fourth RNTI (SPS-C-RNTI or CS-RNTI). In the above, the second RNTI (eg, C-RNTI) can be used to indicate scheduling of a general terminal, and the third RNTI (eg, MCS-C-RNTI) is a modulation or coding method of the terminal (modulation and conding scheme), and the fourth RNTI (SPS-C-RNTI or CS-RNTI) can be used to indicate periodic transmission resources of the UE.

Based on the method proposed in FIG. 1h, the base station activates or deactivates the state of the cell or cell group of the terminal with the DCI of the PDCCH in the activation time (1h-05) or short time period (1h-04) set in the RRC message. You can also instruct it to go dormant. In addition, in the above, the terminal may perform a PDCCH monitoring procedure in order to receive an indication of the state of the cell or cell group in the activation time (1h-05) or short time interval (1h-04) set in the RRC message. In the above, if the dual access technology is configured for the UE, the UE can monitor the PDCCH in the activation time (1h-05) or short time period (1h-04) set in the RRC message in the PCell of the MCG, and the PDCCH The DCI may receive an indication of an activation, deactivation, or dormancy state for a cell (SCell) of the MCG or a PSCell (or SCell) of the SCG, and the UE may receive a cell (or partial bandwidth) activation procedure or deactivation procedure accordingly. Alternatively, a dormant procedure or a partial bandwidth switching procedure may be performed. That is, the base station uses the DCI of the PDCCH in the activation time (1h-05) or short time interval (1h-04) set in the RRC message in the PCell of the MCG for the cell (SCell) of the MCG or the PSCell (or SCell) of the SCG. An activation, inactivation, or dormancy state may be instructed to the terminal.

1i is a diagram illustrating a method of managing an idle partial bandwidth in an activated SCell or PSCell proposed in the present disclosure.

As shown in FIG. 1f, the base station may configure a plurality of SCells for carrier aggregation technology in an RRC message to the terminal, allocate each SCell identifier, and set a dormant part bandwidth for each SCell, or multiple SCells for dual access technology. Cell groups may be set, cell group identifiers may be allocated, cell group stop indicators may be set or indicated for each cell group or a PSCell of each cell group, or a dormant bandwidth may be set. In addition, the plurality of SCells may be included in each SCell group, and one SCell group may include a plurality of SCells. In the above, a SCell group identifier may be allocated to each SCell group, and a plurality of SCell identifiers may be included or mapped to each SCell group identifier. In the above, the Scell identifier value or the SCell group identifier value may be assigned as a value of a predetermined bit and may have an integer value (or an integer value). Alternatively, the PSCell of each cell group may be indicated by a cell group identifier.

In FIG. 1i, the base station defines a new bitmap in the DCI of the PDCCH transmitted from the PCell, and each bit value of the bitmap is each SCell identifier value, each SCell group identifier value, or cell group (or secondary cell group) identifier or cell Mapping to indicate the PSCell (or SCell) of the group (or secondary cell group), and defining each bit value to SCell corresponding to the bit or SCells belonging to the SCell group or cell group (or secondary cell group) or cell group The PSCell (or SCell) of (or the secondary cell group) may be instructed whether to switch to the dormant partial bandwidth or to activate the dormant partial bandwidth, or to stop or resume the cell group. In addition, for the SCell corresponding to the bit or the SCells belonging to the SCell group or the cell group (or secondary cell group) identifier or the PSCell (or SCell) of the cell group (or secondary cell group), the normal partial bandwidth in the dormant partial bandwidth ( For example, it may indicate whether to switch to the first activation partial bandwidth activated from dormancy or to activate the normal partial bandwidth (eg, first activation partial bandwidth activated from dormancy).

In FIG. 1i, after receiving the DCI of the PDCCH from the PCell (1i-01), the terminal reads the DCI and indicates the partial bandwidth of the SCell or SCell groups (for example, switching to a dormant partial bandwidth or activating or normal partial bandwidth) Switching or activating) or a cell group (or secondary cell group) or cell group (or secondary cell group) PSCell (or SCell) can be checked whether there is a bitmap including an instruction to stop or resume. If there is, the PSCell (or PSCell (or SCell), a partial bandwidth may be switched or activated, or a cell group may be suspended or resumed according to the bit value. For example, the bits of the bitmap are the first SCell (or the first SCell identifier, 1i-02), the cell group (or secondary cell group), or the PSCell (or SCell) of the cell group (or secondary cell group). or indicates a group of SCells (or group identifiers of SCells) including the first SCell, and if the bit value is 0 (or 1), the UE selects the first SCell (1i-02) or cell group ( Alternatively, the partial bandwidth (1i-21) may be activated as the dormant sub-bandwidth (1i-22) for PSCell (or SCell) of the secondary cell group) or cell group (or secondary cell group), or the current partial bandwidth may be set to the dormant part can switch to the bandwidth (1i-22) or, if the current partial bandwidth is not the dormant sub-bandwidth, switch or activate the currently active sub-bandwidth (1i-21) to the dormant sub-bandwidth (1i-22) ( 1i-25) or the cell group can be suspended or deactivated. As another method, the cell group (or secondary cell group) or the partial bandwidth of the PSCell (or SCell) of the cell group (or secondary cell group) is maintained as it is, and the second DRX configuration information or the second SRS proposed in the present disclosure is maintained. Power consumption of the UE may be reduced by applying configuration information and performing PDCCH monitoring with a long cycle or performing SRS transmission with a long cycle.

In FIG. 1i, after receiving the DCI of the PDCCH from the PCell (1i-01), the terminal reads the DCI and indicates the partial bandwidth of the SCell or SCell groups (for example, switching to a dormant partial bandwidth or activating or normal partial bandwidth) switching to or activating) or a cell group (or secondary cell group) or a cell group (or secondary cell group) cell group (or secondary cell group) cell group (or secondary cell group) cell group (or secondary cell group) cell group (or secondary cell group) cell group (or secondary cell group) indication or a bitmap including an indication to suspend or resume the cell group It is possible to check whether there is a bitmap, and if there is, the SCell indicated by each bit of the bitmap or the SCells (1i-02, 1i-03) belonging to the SCell group or the cell group (or secondary cell group) or cell group ( Alternatively, the partial bandwidth may be switched or activated according to the bit value of the PSCell (or SCell) of the secondary cell group, or the cell group may be suspended or resumed. For example, the bits of the bitmap indicate the second SCell (or the second SCell identifier, 1i-03), or the SCell group (or SCell group identifier) or cell group including the second SCell ( Or secondary cell group) or PSCell (or SCell) of the cell group (or secondary cell group) is indicated, and if the bit value is 1 (or 0), the UE determines that the second SCell (1i-03) is currently active. If the active sub-bandwidth is the dormant sub-bandwidth (1i-32) or the currently active sub-bandwidth is not normal sub-bandwidth or the current sub-bandwidth (or cell) is active and the current sub-bandwidth is the dormant sub-bandwidth (1i-32) If it is activated (or if it is activated with a partial bandwidth other than the general partial bandwidth), the partial bandwidth of the second SCell (1i-03) is set as an RRC message (eg, first activation activated from dormancy) Partial bandwidth, 1i-33) can be switched or activated (1i-35) or a cell group can be resumed or activated. In the above, since the bit value is 1 (or 0), the SCell indicated by the bit or the SCells belonging to the SCell group or the PSCell (or SCell) of the cell group (or secondary cell group) or cell group (or secondary cell group) is inactive. When switching to or activating a partial bandwidth rather than a partial bandwidth or when a cell group needs to be resumed, the SCell or each SCell belonging to the Scell group is activated if the SCell status is inactive or if the SCell status is active and active If the specified partial bandwidth is not a dormant partial bandwidth (or if it is a normal partial bandwidth), the bit value may not be applied, or may be ignored, or may not be read, or the cell group (or secondary cell group) or cell group in the above If the PSCell (or SCell) of (or the secondary cell group) is already activated or resumed, the bit value may not be applied, may be ignored, or may not be read. In addition, since the bit value is 0 (or 1) in the above, the SCell or SCell group belonging to the SCell group indicated by the bit or the PSCell (or SCell) of the cell group (or secondary cell group) or cell group (or secondary cell group) In the case of switching or activating to the dormant sub-bandwidth or in case of stopping the cell group, the SCell or each SCell belonging to the Scell group has the bit value if the state of the SCell is active and the activated sub-bandwidth is the dormant sub-bandwidth. may not be applied, or may be ignored, or may not be read, or the cell group (or secondary cell group) or PSCell (or SCell) of the cell group (or secondary cell group) is already stopped or deactivated. If it is, the bit value may not be applied, may be ignored, or may not be read.

Hereinafter, methods for quickly activating a cell (SCell, PSCell, or SCell) when activating are proposed.

Specifically, the base station may set first channel measurement configuration information capable of quickly measuring and reporting a channel when the terminal activates the cell in an RRC message (RRCReconfiguration or RRCResume). The first channel measurement setting information includes setting information of a cell (eg, PCell, PSCell, or SCell) of the cell group in order to quickly activate the cell or cell group so that the cell can quickly perform channel measurement. Frequent channel measurement signals (e.g. Radios resource or Reference Signal or TRS (temporary reference signal) or SSB (synchronization signal block) or CSI-RS (channel state Information reference signal) or RS (Reference Signal) period or transmitted transmission resource information (frequency or time transmission resource at which the frequent channel measurement signal is transmitted) or interval or number of times (the number of times the frequent channel measurement signal is transmitted) Alternatively, a timer value (the time at which the frequent channel measurement signal is transmitted) or a time interval (the interval at which the frequent channel measurement signal is transmitted (for example, an offset in a time unit (slot, subframe, symbol, etc.)) or a terminal It may include setting information such as transmission resources or period or interval or timing or offset for which the measured result should be reported. In the above, the first channel measurement setting information is a reporting period at which the terminal can report the channel measurement result ( Or transmission resources) can be set short, or many signals for channel measurement (or transmission resources or (eg, Radios resource or Reference Signal or TRS (for example, Radios resource or Reference Signal or TRS) Temporary Reference Signal)) can be characterized in that transmission resources for channel measurement can be set so that the base station can transmit a lot or frequently. may include configuration information for a signal for measuring a channel for a specific terminal (or terminals). In addition, the first channel measurement configuration information may be set differently for each cell or for each partial bandwidth for a plurality of cells or partial bandwidths configured in the RRC message, and the terminal can easily measure transmission resources for channel measurement. In order to support this, beam-related setting information (transmission configuration indication (TCI) state or quasi co-location (QCL)) such as beam direction, beam number, or beam position may be set together. In addition, the first channel measurement setting information includes a timing advance (TA) value (or offset value) for synchronizing the downlink signal of the base station or the uplink signal of the base station, or a timer indicating the validity of the TA value (TAT, time alignment timer) or timer value (TAT value) to correctly perform channel measurement or channel measurement report. For example, the period of the signal for measuring the channel or the number of signals transmitted, the period during which the signal is transmitted or the offset for the time during which the signal is transmitted or the length of time between signals to be transmitted or a plurality of channels that can be transmitted A list of signals or a time transmission resource (or frequency transmission resource) indicating the position of a signal to be transmitted or a transmission resource (time transmission resource or frequency transmission resource) for reporting a measurement result or a period for reporting a measurement result, or Beam-related setting information (transmission configuration indication (TCI) state or quasi co-location (QCL)) for measuring the channel measurement signals may be included. In addition, the first channel measurement configuration information set as the RRC message may include a plurality of channel measurement signal information, and any one of the plurality of channel measurement signal information set above as an RRC message or MAC CE or DCI. Signal information for channel measurement or beam configuration information may be indicated so that the terminal performs channel measurement or channel measurement report by applying or using the indicated channel measurement signal information or beam configuration information. The method indicated above may define a mapping between a bitmap, index, or identifier and signal information for measurement of each channel set above, and may indicate the mapping based on this. In another method, by setting or instructing signal information for channel measurement with the RRC message or MAC CE, the terminal performs channel measurement by applying or using the set (or indicated) signal information for channel measurement, or You can make a measurement report.

As another method, when the RRC message includes the first channel measurement configuration information and configures the terminal, when the RRC message sets the cell state to an active state and instructs the cell to be activated by the RRC message, the The cell may be quickly activated by quickly measuring or reporting a channel by applying or using the first channel measurement setting information. For example, first channel measurement setting information or signal information for channel measurement or beam-related setting information that can be applied when instructing to activate a cell with an RRC message by setting the state of a cell to an active state in an RRC message Set as separate setting information in the RRC message (default configuration or only signal information for channel measurement (or beam-related setting information) corresponding to ID 0 or signal information for measuring one channel (or beam-related setting information)) If it is set, signal information for measuring the channel (or beam-related setting information) may be applied).

The first channel measurement setting information proposed in the present disclosure may be characterized in that only downlink partial bandwidth setting information of each cell can be set. That is, the first channel measurement configuration information proposed in the present disclosure may not be set for uplink partial bandwidth configuration information of each cell. This is because the UE must first measure the channel for the downlink so that it can correctly receive the PDCCH and follow the instructions to the base station after reporting the measurement result for the channel or cell.

The first channel measurement configuration information proposed in the present disclosure may be initially deactivated when configured as an RRC message or after handover, and later MAC control information or PDCCH DCI proposed in the present disclosure It can be activated by information or RRC message. When the RRC message is configured as described above, the base station can easily manage the cell state or the channel measurement procedure of the UE only when the initial state is inactive, and the UE can measure when and how the channel is measured without processing delay of the RRC message. The timing of what to do can also be done accurately.

In addition, the second channel measurement configuration information may be included or configured in the RRC message (RRCReconfiguration or RRCResume). The second channel measurement setting information may include general channel measurement setting information such as transmission resource or period or time interval or number of times of a signal for channel measurement or transmission resource or period or time interval for channel measurement report.

Hereinafter, as proposed above, when the first channel measurement configuration information or the second channel measurement information is set in the UE through the RRC message, the cell is activated and the channel is rapidly measured based on the first channel measurement configuration information. We propose a structure or indication method of MAC control information (MAC Control Element) capable of performing or reporting measurement results and quickly activating a cell. For example, the MAC control information (or RRC message) proposed in the present disclosure may indicate which cell is to be activated or deactivated among a plurality of cells (SCells) configured with RRC, or which cell is to be activated. If indicated, the MAC control information (or RRC message) applies which signal information for measurement among the first channel measurement configuration information set in the RRC message above, how to measure a signal (e.g., how many times signal transmission resource , or how many signals are transmitted, or in which time interval to measure, or based on which offset to determine the measurement time interval, in what period to measure the signal, or in which transmission resource to measure the signal, etc. can indicate), how to report (for example, how many times to report the measurement result or in which time interval to report the measurement result, or based on what offset to determine the measurement result reporting transmission resource, or In what cycle to report the measurement result or in which transmission resource to report the measurement result), quickly activate the cell based on the first channel measurement configuration information set in the RRC message allow it to be done

1j is a diagram illustrating an embodiment in which the embodiments proposed in the present disclosure are extended and applied to an RRC inactive mode terminal.

In the present disclosure, a cell group or cell may indicate a PCell of a Master Cell Group (MCG), a SCell of an MCG, a PSCell of a Secondary Cell Group (SCG), or a SCell of an SCG.

In the above embodiment, in the RRC connection mode, as shown in FIG. 1f, the SCell configuration information set or stored for the proposed embodiments (eg, configuration information described or proposed in FIG. 1f) or a cell group (eg, , secondary cell group), it is proposed to continuously store the PSCell (or SCell) configuration information without releasing or discarding it even if the UE transitions to the RRC inactivation mode. In addition, when the RRC inactive mode terminal performs the RRC connection resumption procedure, the SCell configuration information stored through an indicator of an RRCResume message or an RRCReconfiguration message transmitted by the base station or through a reset procedure It is proposed to determine whether to discard or release or maintain and apply the configuration information of PSCell (or SCell) of the described or proposed configuration information) or cell group (eg, secondary cell group), or perform resetting. . In addition, when the base station transmits an RRCRelease message including a setting or indicator for transitioning the terminal to the RRC inactive mode to the terminal, the SCell setting information stored in the RRCRelease message (eg, the setting information described or proposed in FIG. 1f) or An indicator or configuration information indicating whether to discard or release PSCell (or SCell) configuration information of a cell group (eg, secondary cell group), to maintain and apply, or to perform resetting may be transmitted to the UE. there is. In addition, the terminal performs movement in the RRC inactive mode, and when performing RNA (RAN notification area) update, the SCell setting information stored in the RRCRelease message transmitted to the terminal by the base station (eg, the SCell configuration information described in FIG. 1f) Or suggested setting information) or indicator or setting information indicating whether to discard or release or maintain and apply the PSCell (or SCell) setting information of the cell group (eg, secondary cell group) or perform resetting can be received and applied.

In the embodiment proposed in the present disclosure, the base station is the PSCell (or SCell) of the SCell configuration information (eg, the configuration information described or proposed in FIG. 1f) or the cell group (eg, secondary cell group) of the RRC message. ) In the configuration information, the first active partial bandwidth of the downlink or uplink partial bandwidth configuration information of each cell is allowed to be set to the dormant partial bandwidth, so that the terminal can configure each SCell or each cell group or the PSCell of each cell group. When activated, the downlink partial bandwidth or uplink partial bandwidth of each SCell or each cell group or PSCell of each cell group can be operated directly as the dormant partial bandwidth, or the cell group can be stopped or resumed, so that the battery of the terminal consumption can be reduced.

As another method, in the embodiment proposed in the present disclosure, the base station transmits SCell configuration information (eg, configuration information described or suggested in FIG. 1F) or cell group (eg, secondary cell group) of the RRC message. In the PSCell (or SCell) configuration information, the first active partial bandwidth of the downlink or uplink partial bandwidth configuration information of each cell may not be set to the dormant partial bandwidth, and the UE may not set each SCell or each cell group or each cell group. When activating or resuming the PSCell, the downlink partial bandwidth or uplink partial bandwidth of each SCell or each cell group or PSCell of each cell group is always activated as the first activation partial bandwidth, and the embodiment proposed in the present disclosure Battery consumption of the terminal may be reduced by switching or activating a cell group to an idle partial bandwidth or by stopping or resuming a cell group.

In addition, in the embodiment proposed above, it may be extended and applied to each SCell configuration information or PSCell configuration information of a master cell group (MCG) or secondary cell group (SCG) of a terminal in which dual connectivity has been configured. That is, SCell configuration information or PSCell configuration information of the SCG can also be stored when the UE transitions to the RRC inactive mode, and when performing the RRC connection resumption procedure as described above or when the UE transitions to the RRC inactive mode, the RRC message ( For example, RRCResume or RRCReconfiguration or RRCRelease) of the MCG or SCG SCell configuration information (eg, configuration information described or proposed in FIG. 1f) or PSCell configuration information stored as and may transmit to the terminal including an indicator or setting information indicating whether to apply or perform resetting.

In FIG. 1j, the terminal 1j-01 can perform network connection with the base station 1j-02 and transmit/receive data (1j-05). If the base station needs to transition the terminal to the RRC inactive mode for a predetermined reason, the base station can transmit the RRCRelease message (1j-20) to make the terminal transition to the RRC inactive mode. SCell configuration information (eg, configuration information described or suggested in FIG. 1F) of the MCG or SCG stored in the RRC message (eg, RRCRelease) or PSCell of a cell group (eg, secondary cell group) (or SCell) may transmit to the terminal including an indicator or configuration information indicating whether to discard or release the configuration information, to maintain and apply the configuration information, or to perform resetting. In the case of a terminal to which dual access technology is applied, the base station determines whether to suspend and resume master cell group bearer configuration, RRC configuration information, or SCell configuration information of MCG or SCG, and transmits secondary cell group bearer configuration and RRC configuration information. In order to determine whether to stop and resume, a decision may be made by asking the secondary cell base station whether to stop and resume, and receiving a response (1j-15). In addition, in the RRCRelease message, the base station may set a list of frequencies to be measured by the terminal in an RRC idle mode or an RRC inactive mode, frequency measurement configuration information, or a period for measuring frequencies.

In the above, the RRC inactive mode terminal may perform an RRC connection resume procedure when receiving a paging message while moving (1j-25), when there is a need to transmit uplink data, or when there is a need to update the LAN indication area. .

When the terminal needs to establish a connection, the random access procedure is performed and the RRCResumeRequest message is transmitted to the base station. The proposed terminal operation related to the transmission of the message is as follows (1j-30).

1. The terminal checks the system information, and when the system information instructs to transmit the complete terminal connection resume identifier (I-RNTI or Full resume ID), the stored complete terminal connection resume identifier (I-RNTI) is included in the message and transmitted. Get ready. If the system information instructs to transmit the segmented terminal connection resume identifier (truncated I-RNTI or truncated resume ID), the stored complete terminal connection resume identifier (I-RNTI) is divided by a predetermined method (truncated resume) ID) and include it in the message to prepare for transmission.

2. The terminal restores RRC connection configuration information and security context information from the terminal context in which it was stored.

3. The UE updates the new KgNB security key corresponding to the master cell group based on the current KgNB security key, NH (NextHop) value, and NCC value received and stored in the RRCRelease message.

4. And if the UE receives the SCG-counter value (or sk-counter) in the RRCRelease message, the new SKgNB security key corresponding to the secondary cell group is based on the KgNB security key and the SCG-counter value (or sk-counter) value. update with

5. The terminal derives new security keys (K_RRCenc, K_RRC_int, K_UPint, K_UPenc) to be used in integrity protection and verification procedures and encryption and decryption procedures using the newly updated KgNB security key.

6. And if the terminal receives the SCG-counter value (or sk-counter) in the RRCRelease message, in the integrity protection and verification procedure and encryption and decryption procedure using the newly updated SKgNB security key corresponding to the secondary cell group Derives new security keys (SK_RRCenc, SK_RRC_int, SK_UPint, SK_UPenc) to be used.

7. Then, the UE calculates the MAC-I and includes it in the message to prepare for transmission.

8. Then, the terminal resumes SRB1 (because it will receive an RRCResume message to SRB1 in response to the RRCResumeRequset message to be transmitted, it must be resumed in advance).

9. The RRCResumeRequset message is constructed and delivered to the lower layer device.

10. For all bearers (MCG terminated RBs) except for SRB0 corresponding to the master cell group, the renewed security keys and previously set algorithm are applied to resume the integrity protection and verification procedure, and data transmitted and received thereafter Integrity verification and protection are applied to (to increase reliability and security of data transmitted and received from SRB1 or DRBs later).

11. Encryption and decryption procedures are resumed by applying the updated security keys and previously set algorithms to all bearers (MCG terminated RBs) except for SRB0 corresponding to the master cell group. Encryption and decryption are applied to (to increase reliability and security of data transmitted and received from SRB1 or DRBs later)

12. If the UE receives the SCG-counter value (or sk-counter) in the RRCRelease message, the UE applies the updated security keys and previously set algorithm to all bearers (SCG terminated RBs) corresponding to the secondary cell group. Integrity protection and verification procedures are resumed, and integrity verification and protection are applied to data transmitted and received thereafter (to increase reliability and security of data transmitted and received from DRBs thereafter).

13. If the UE receives the SCG-counter value (or sk-counter) in the RRCRelease message, the updated security keys and previously set algorithm are applied to all bearers (SCG terminated RBs) corresponding to the secondary cell group. Encryption and decryption procedures are resumed, and encryption and decryption are applied to data transmitted and received thereafter (to increase reliability and security of data transmitted and received from DRBs).

In the above, when the terminal needs to establish a connection, performs the random access procedure, transmits the RRCResumeRequest message to the base station, and receives the RRCResume message in response, the proposed terminal operation is as follows (1j-35). If the RRCResume message includes an indicator to report if there is a valid frequency measurement result measured in the RRC inactive mode to the UE, the UE can configure and report the frequency measurement result in the RRCResumeComplete message. In addition, in the RRC message (eg, RRCResume), the base station discards or cancels the SCell configuration information (eg, configuration information described or proposed in FIG. 1f) of the MCG or SCG stored by the terminal, or An indicator or setting information indicating whether to maintain and apply or perform resetting may be transmitted to the terminal.

1. Upon receiving the message, the UE restores the PDCP state corresponding to the master cell group, resets the COUNT value, and re-establishes PDCP layer devices of SRB2 and all DRBs (MCG terminated RBs) corresponding to the master cell group. do.

2. If the UE receives the SCG-counter value (or sk-counter) in the above message, the UE updates the new SKgNB security key corresponding to the secondary cell group based on the KgNB security key and the SCG-counter value (or sk-counter) value. do. In addition, new security keys (SK_RRCenc, SK_RRC_int, SK_UPint, SK_UPenc) to be used in integrity protection and verification procedures and encryption and decryption procedures are derived using the newly updated SKgNB security keys corresponding to the secondary cell group.

3. If the message includes master cell group configuration information

A. Perform and apply the master cell group configuration information included in the message. The master cell group information may include configuration information for RLC layer devices belonging to the master cell group, a logical channel identifier, a bearer identifier, and the like.

4. If the message includes bearer configuration information (radioBearerConfig)

A. Performs and applies bearer configuration information (radioBearerConfig) included in the message. The bearer configuration information (radioBearerConfig) may include configuration information for PDCP layer devices, configuration information for SDAP layer devices, a logical channel identifier, and a bearer identifier for each bearer.

5. If the message includes secondary cell group (masterCellgroup) configuration information

A. Performs and applies secondary cell group configuration information included in the message. The secondary cell group information may include configuration information about RLC layer devices belonging to the secondary cell group, a logical channel identifier, a bearer identifier, and the like.

6. If the message includes secondary bearer configuration information (radioBearerConfig)

A. Performs and applies secondary bearer configuration information (radioBearerConfig) included in the message. The secondary bearer configuration information (radioBearerConfig) may include configuration information for PDCP layer devices for each secondary bearer, configuration information for SDAP layer devices, a logical channel identifier, a bearer identifier, and the like.

7. The UE resumes SRB2 corresponding to the master cell group and all DRBs (MCG terminated RBs).

8. If the message includes frequency measurement configuration information (measConfig)

A. Performs and applies the frequency measurement configuration information included in the message. That is, frequency measurement may be performed according to the above settings.

9. The UE transitions to the RRC connected mode.

10. The UE instructs the upper layer device that the suspended RRC connection has been resumed.

11. And constructs and transmits the RRCResumeComplete message for transmission to the lower layer (1j-40).

In the above, when the UE has bearer configuration information and UE context information for the suspended secondary cell group, frequency measurement is performed based on frequency configuration information set in system information, RRCRelease message, or RRCResume message, and there is a valid result. , In order to indicate that there is this result, an indicator may be included in the RRCResumeComplete message and transmitted. When receiving the indicator, the base station instructs the terminal to report the frequency measurement result when carrier aggregation or dual connectivity needs to be resumed (1j-45), and receives the report of the frequency measurement result. Alternatively, the frequency measurement result may be reported and received in the RRCResumeComplete message above (1j-50). Upon receiving the frequency measurement result, the base station may ask the secondary cell base station whether to resume bearer information for the suspended secondary cell group, receive a response, and make a decision. You can indicate whether to resume or release bearers for In addition, in the RRC message (eg, RRCReconfiguration), the base station determines whether to discard or release SCell configuration information (eg, configuration information described or proposed in FIG. 1f) of the MCG or SCG stored by the UE, or An indicator or setting information indicating whether to maintain and apply or perform resetting may be transmitted to the terminal.

In the embodiment proposed in FIG. 1j of the present disclosure, the base station SCell configuration information (eg, configuration information described or proposed in FIG. 1f) or cell group of the RRC message (eg, RRCRelease or RRCResume or RRCReconfiguartion) In the PSCell (or SCell) setting information of (eg, secondary cell group), the first active partial bandwidth of the downlink or uplink partial bandwidth configuration information of each cell is allowed to be set to the dormant partial bandwidth, so that the terminal can set each SCell Alternatively, when activating a PSCell of a cell group (eg, secondary cell group), the downlink partial bandwidth or uplink partial bandwidth of each SCell or PSCell can be operated directly as a dormant partial bandwidth, or the cell group is stopped or resumed This can reduce battery consumption of the terminal. For example, in each SCell or PSCell, the SCell status is set to an active state in the SCell configuration information or cell group configuration information of the RRC message (eg, RRCRelease or RRCResume or RRCReconfiguartion), or the cell group status is set to an active state or When set to a suspended or deactivated state, when an instruction to suspend or resume a cell group is set, or when an instruction to activate the SCell is received in the MAC control information proposed in the present disclosure, activate or deactivate the SCell or PSCell It can be resumed or stopped, and when activating the SCell or PSCell, the downlink partial bandwidth or uplink partial bandwidth of the SCell or PSCell can be directly activated as an idle partial bandwidth to operate a method of saving the battery of the terminal.

And, as described above, when the RRC inactive mode terminal transitions to the RRC connected mode and recovers, applies, or resets the SCell configuration information or the PSCell (or SCell) configuration information of the cell group (eg, secondary cell group) proposed in the present disclosure , Switching between partial bandwidths or activating or dormant partial bandwidth may be activated or applied to each activated SCell or PSCell (or SCell) of a cell group according to the embodiments proposed in the present disclosure. In addition, the embodiments of the present disclosure may be extended and applied to handover.

In the above, if the terminal receives a stop or resume or activation or deactivation indicator for a cell or a cell group or a PSCell of a cell group according to the embodiments proposed in the present disclosure, the PHY layer device or MAC layer device receiving the indication The indication may be directed to a higher layer device (eg, a MAC layer device, an RLC layer device, a PDCP layer device, or an RRC layer device). In the above, if the upper layer device receives the instruction (eg, cell group suspension or resumption, activation or deactivation) from the lower layer device, the protocol layer device's procedure for stopping or resuming or activating or deactivating the cell group corresponding thereto can be performed. Alternatively, as in the embodiments of the present disclosure, if the terminal receives a stop or resume or activation or deactivation indicator for a cell group or a PSCell of a cell group in an RRC message, the RRC layer device receiving the indication transmits the indication to a lower level A layer device (for example, a PHY layer device, a MAC layer device, an RLC layer device, or a PDCP layer device) may be instructed. In the above, when the lower layer device receives the instruction (eg, cell group suspension or resume or activation or deactivation) from the upper layer device (eg, RRC layer device), the cell group corresponding to it is stopped or resumed or activated or The procedure of the protocol layer device for deactivation can be performed.

Various embodiments may be configured and operated by converging or extending the embodiments proposed in the present disclosure.

1K illustrates a first signaling procedure for setting up or releasing dual access technology, or activating, resuming, stopping, or inactivating a secondary cell group configured with dual access technology in a next-generation mobile communication system to which the present disclosure can be applied. It is an illustrated drawing.

In FIG. 1K , a first signaling procedure for setting or releasing the dual access technology or setting or releasing or activating or resuming or stopping or inactivating a secondary cell group configured with the dual access technology is as follows.

In FIG. 1K, a UE establishes an RRC connection with a network or a base station as in FIG. Cells (PCell or SCell) and data transmission or reception may be performed.

In the above, the base station configures the dual access technology to the terminal according to a predetermined reason (eg, when a high data rate is required, or at the request of the terminal (1k-05) or when high QoS requirements must be satisfied). can For example, the terminal may send a request to the base station to set up or release or activate or deactivate or resume or stop the dual access technology or cell group (eg, secondary cell group) or cell, and in the request message, the frequency (or channel) measurement result report or cell group identifier or cell identifiers or measurement results (1k-05). In another method, the base station determines whether to establish or release a dual access technology or cell group (eg, secondary cell group) or cell in consideration of the amount of downlink (or uplink) data or the amount of buffer. You can also decide whether to disable or disable or enable or resume or change or reset or pause.

In the above, the master base station (MN (Master Node) or MCG (Master Cell Group)) receives a frequency or channel measurement report for each frequency or channel received from the terminal, and is a secondary base station to configure dual access technology based on the measurement report. (Secondary Node (SN) or Secondary Cell Group (SCG)) may be determined. Or whether the base station establishes or releases or adds a dual access technology or cell group (eg, secondary cell group) or cell in consideration of the amount of downlink (or uplink) data or the amount of buffer by the master base station. You can also decide to disable or enable or resume or change or reset or stop. In the above, the master base station sets or releases or adds or deactivates or activates or resumes or changes or resets the dual access technology or cell group (eg, secondary cell group) or cell to the determined secondary base station. Alternatively, a message requesting whether it is possible to set or add to the secondary cell group of the terminal in order to stop may be transmitted to the secondary base station through an Xn interface (eg, interface between base stations) or Sn interface (interface between base station and AMF or UMF or base station). Yes (1k-10). In the request message, the secondary base station is instructed to set up or release or add or deactivate or activate or resume or change or reset or stop the dual access technology or cell group (eg secondary cell group) or cell. Alternatively, a new indicator may be defined in an existing message (eg, SN addition request message, SN modification request message, SN release request message, etc.) Groups (eg, secondary cell groups) or cells may be set, released, added, deactivated, activated, resumed, changed, reset, or stopped (or requested). The request message includes information such as cell group configuration information (eg, master cell group configuration information) or bearer configuration information currently set in the UE, capability information of the UE, or frequency (or channel) measurement result information of the UE. When the secondary base station configures the secondary cell group for the UE by referring to the above information, the secondary cell group configuration information or bearer configuration information may be configured according to the UE capability or not exceeding the UE capability or according to the bearer configuration information of the master cell group. can make it

When the secondary base station (SCG) receiving the request message (1k-10) rejects the request message, configures a rejection message and configures an Xn interface (for example, an interface between base stations) or an Sn interface (base station and AMF or UMF Alternatively, it may be transmitted to the master base station through an interface between base stations) (1k-15). If accepting the request message, the secondary base station establishes or releases or adds or deactivates or activates or resumes or changes a dual access technology or cell group (e.g., secondary cell group) or cell. Alternatively, a request acceptance message including setting information or indicators for resetting or stopping may be transmitted to the master base station through an Xn interface (eg, interface between base stations) or an Sn interface (interface between base stations and AMF or UMF or base stations). (1k-15). The request acceptance message may include some of the following information.

- An identifier identical to the message identifier included in the request message or an indicator that the request requested in the request message is accepted

- configuration information or indicators for establishing or releasing or adding or deactivating or activating or resuming or changing or resetting or stopping a dual access technology or cell group (e.g. secondary cell group) or cell; (e.g., configuration information or indicators for the master cell group)

- configuration information or indicators for establishing or releasing or adding or deactivating or activating or resuming or changing or resetting or stopping a dual access technology or cell group (e.g. secondary cell group) or cell; The first RRC message (eg, RRCReconfiguration message) including

- The first RRC message may include some of the following information.

■ A first RRC message identifier (eg, rrc-Transaction identifier) for distinguishing the first RRC message. Since the terminal and the base station (eg, the secondary base station) transmit or receive multiple RRC messages to each other, an identifier for distinguishing each RRC message may be included in the RRC message. For example, an RRC message (eg, RRCReconfiguration) transmitted by a transmitter or an RRC message (eg, RRCReconfigurationComplete) corresponding to the RRC message (eg, RRCReconfiguration) transmitted by a receiver or the RRC transmitted by a transmitter The RRC message corresponding to the message may include the same first RRC message identifier.

■ Setup information or indicators for setting up or releasing or adding or deactivating or activating or resuming or changing or resetting or stopping a dual access technology or cell group (eg, secondary cell group) or cell (eg, configuration information or indicator for a terminal)

■ Indicators indicating the state of the cell group (eg active or inactive or suspended or resumed).

■ A cell group identifier for distinguishing cell groups. The cell group identifier may be assigned by the master base station, or a secondary base station may assign one identifier among previously agreed identifiers.)

■ Cell group or cell setting information

■ Bearer setup information. For example, indicator information (eg, PDCP stop indicator or PDCP re-establishment indicator) indicating the operation of each bearer protocol layer device (eg, SDAP layer device, PDCP layer device, RLC layer device, or MAC layer device) or PDCP data recovery indicator or RLC re-establishment indicator or MAC part initialization indicator or MAC initialization indicator or indicator triggering a new operation)

■ In the above, if the dual access technology or cell group (eg, secondary cell group) or cell is set, added, or activated, or resumed, or changed, or reset, if the setting information or indicator is included, the first An indicator (eg, mobilityControlInfor or ReconfigurationWithSync) may also be included. However, in the case of including setting information or indicators for releasing, inactivating, resetting, or stopping the dual access technology or cell group (eg, secondary cell group) or cell, the first indicator (eg, mobilityControlInfor or ReconfigurationWithSync). In the above, the first indicator may be an indicator for triggering a random access procedure to the cell group or cell, or an indicator for synchronizing a signal with a new cell, or an indicator for instructing a frequency movement of a terminal. Alternatively, it may be an indicator indicating a change of cell group (or cell).

■ Random access in case of including configuration information or indicators for setting, adding, activating, resuming, changing, or resetting a dual access technology or cell group (eg, secondary cell group) or cell in the above description. You can also include configuration information. However, the random access setting information may not be included in the above case where setting information or indicators for releasing, inactivating, resetting, or stopping a dual access technology or cell group (eg, secondary cell group) or cell are included. can The random access configuration information may include random access transmission resource information (time or frequency transmission resource) or designated preamble information for preamble transmission for the cell group or cell.

■ Time information (eg, timing) indicating when to activate or resume or deactivate or suspend a dual access technology or cell group (eg secondary cell group) or cell (PSCell or SCG SCell) Information indicating (eg, X), time unit, subframe or time slot or symbol unit), for example, if the message is received in the nth time unit, whether to activate the cell at the n+Xth time unit or time information indicating whether to resume, disable, or stop)

■ 1st channel measurement setting information for each cell or partial bandwidth

■ Second channel measurement setting information for each cell or partial bandwidth

■ An indicator to add cell group settings, an indicator to change a cell group (ReconfigurationWithSync), or an indicator to direct random access procedure (ReconfigurationWithSync or a newly defined indicator)

■ When activating a cell group, an indicator instructing whether to activate the cell group by performing a random access procedure or activating the cell group without a random access procedure (ReconfigurationWithSync or a newly defined indicator)

■ RRM (radio resource management) setting information or frequency measurement setting information or separate RRM (radio resource management) setting information or frequency measurement setting information (eg, battery saving Simplified frequency measurement setting information (Reduced or Relaxed RRM setting information)

■ Setting information for radio link monitoring (RLM) or setting information for RLM to be applied or to be performed when a cell group is deactivated. For example, when a cell group is deactivated, configuration information of beams in units of cells to be measured by the UE or configuration information of beams for each partial bandwidth, and beam-related configuration information (transmission configuration indication (TCI) state or quasi co-location (QCL)) May include or a timing advance (TA) value (or offset value) for synchronizing the downlink signal of the base station or the uplink signal of the base station or a timer indicating the validity of the TA value (TAT, time alignment timer) Alternatively, it may include a timer value (TAT value), or SSB (synchronization signal block) setting information or CSI-RS (channel state information reference signal) setting information or RS (reference signal) setting information or beam to be measured. If a failure occurs, transmission resource information (eg, PUCCH configuration information (eg, SR (scheduling request) information or specific transmission resources) or frequency transmission resources or time transmission resources) that can report the result may be included. there is. In addition, the setting information may include partial bandwidth setting information (eg, indicated by a partial bandwidth identifier) indicating in which partial bandwidth the RLM procedure is to be performed. Alternatively, when the cell group state is inactive, the UE activates the cell group by performing the RLM procedure in the first active partial bandwidth (or first active downlink partial bandwidth, firstActiveDownlinkBWP-ID) set in the RRC message. The first activation partial bandwidth to be activated at the time of activation may be monitored early to minimize the cell group activation delay. As another method, when the cell group state is set to a deactivated state (or activated state), the UE performs an RLM procedure in the last (or previously) activated partial bandwidth before the cell group state becomes deactivated, thereby reducing the cell group (For example, when the partial bandwidth setting information indicating which partial bandwidth to perform the RLM procedure is not set), or when activating a cell group, set in the RRC message The activation procedure may be performed in the first active partial bandwidth (or first active downlink partial bandwidth, firstActiveDownlinkBWP-ID). If the partial bandwidth-related setting information indicating in which partial bandwidth to perform the RLM procedure is not set when activating the cell group, the RLM procedure may be performed in the last (or previously) activated partial bandwidth. there is. In addition, the setting information may include beam-related setting information (eg, a partial bandwidth identifier, TCI state, or QCL setting information) indicating which beam to perform the RLM procedure on. . As another method, when the cell group state is inactive, the terminal performs the RLM procedure in the beam (eg, TCI state or QCL configuration information) set in the RRC message or activates the beam and performs the RLM procedure , when activating a cell group, a beam to be activated may be monitored early to minimize cell group activation delay. As another method, when the cell group state is set to the inactive state (or active state), the terminal performs the RLM procedure on the last (or previously) activated beam before the cell group state becomes inactive, so that the cell group (For example, when beam-related setting information indicating which beam to perform the RLM procedure is not set), or when activating a cell group, in the beam set in the RRC message Activation procedures can be performed. If beam-related setting information indicating which beam to perform the RLM procedure is not set when activating the cell group, the RLM procedure may be performed on the last (or previously) activated beam.

■ Setting information for a beam failure detection procedure or BFD (beam failure detection), or setting information for BFD to be applied or to be performed when a cell group is deactivated. For example, when a cell group is deactivated, configuration information of beams in units of cells to be measured by the terminal or configuration information of beams for each partial bandwidth, and beam-related configuration information (transmission configuration indication (TCI) state or quasi co-location (QCL)) May include or a timing advance (TA) value (or offset value) for synchronizing the downlink signal of the base station or the uplink signal of the base station or a timer indicating the validity of the TA value (TAT, time alignment timer) Alternatively, it may include a timer value (TAT value), or SSB (synchronization signal block) setting information, CSI-RS (channel state information reference signal) setting information, or RS (Reference Signal) setting information or beam to be measured. If a failure occurs, transmission resource information (eg, PUCCH configuration information (eg, SR (scheduling request) information or specific transmission resources) or frequency transmission resources or time transmission resources) that can report the result may be included. there is. In addition, the setting information may include partial bandwidth setting information (for example, indicated by a partial bandwidth identifier) indicating in which partial bandwidth the beam failure detection procedure is to be performed. As another method, when the cell group state is inactive, the UE performs a beam failure detection procedure in the first active partial bandwidth (or first active downlink partial bandwidth, firstActiveDownlinkBWP-ID) set in the RRC message, so that the cell group At the time of activation, the initial activation partial bandwidth to be activated may be monitored early to minimize the cell group activation delay. As another method, when the cell group state is set to the inactive state (or active state), the terminal performs a beam failure detection procedure in the last (or previously) activated partial bandwidth before the cell group state becomes inactive. (For example, when partial bandwidth setting information indicating in which partial bandwidth the beam failure detection procedure is to be performed is not set) or to activate the cell group When doing so, the activation procedure may be performed in the first active partial bandwidth (or first active downlink partial bandwidth, firstActiveDownlinkBWP-ID) set in the RRC message. If the partial bandwidth-related setting information indicating in which partial bandwidth the beam failure detection procedure is to be performed is not set when the cell group is activated, the beam failure detection procedure is performed in the last (or previously) activated partial bandwidth. you might as well make it work. In addition, the setting information includes beam-related setting information (eg, a partial bandwidth identifier, TCI state, or QCL setting information) indicating which beam to perform the beam failure detection procedure on. can As another method, when the cell group state is inactive state, the UE should perform the beam failure detection procedure on the beam (eg, TCI state or QCL configuration information) set in the RRC message and activate it when activating the cell group. The cell group activation delay can be minimized by early monitoring of the beam to be used. As another method, when the cell group state is set to the inactive state (or active state), the terminal performs a beam failure detection procedure on the last (or previously) activated beam before the cell group state becomes inactive, thereby detecting the cell It is also possible to keep the connection with the group continuously (for example, when beam-related configuration information indicating which beam to perform the beam failure detection procedure is not set) or when activating a cell group, an RRC message The activation procedure can be performed on the beam set in . If beam-related configuration information indicating which beam to perform the beam failure detection procedure is not set when activating a cell group, the beam failure detection procedure is performed on the last (or previously) activated beam. may be

In the above, when the master base station (MCG) receives the request accept message (1k-15), checks the request accept message, and information included in the request accept message (eg, the request accept message (1k-15) ) The second RRC message (eg, RRCReconfiguration) including the first RRC message included in) may be transmitted to the terminal (1k-20). The second RRC message may include some of the following information.

- A second RRC message identifier (eg, rrc-Transaction identifier) for distinguishing the second RRC message. Since the terminal and the base station (eg, the master base station) transmit or receive multiple RRC messages to each other, an identifier for distinguishing each RRC message may be included in the RRC message. For example, an RRC message (eg, RRCReconfiguration) transmitted by a transmitter or an RRC message (eg, RRCReconfigurationComplete) corresponding to the RRC message (eg, RRCReconfiguration) transmitted by a receiver or the RRC transmitted by a transmitter The RRC message corresponding to the message may include the same second RRC message identifier.

- The first RRC message included in the request acceptance message (1k-15)

- configuration information or indicators for setting up or releasing or adding or deactivating or activating or resuming or changing or resetting or stopping a dual access technology or cell group (e.g. secondary cell group) or cell ( For example, configuration information or indicators for terminals)

- an indicator indicating the state of the cell group (e.g. active or inactive or suspended or resumed)

- A cell group identifier for distinguishing cell groups. The cell group identifier may be assigned by the master base station, or a secondary base station may assign one identifier among previously agreed identifiers.)

- Cell group or cell setting information

- Bearer setup information. For example, indicator information (eg, PDCP stop indicator or PDCP re-establishment indicator) indicating the operation of a protocol layer device (eg, SDAP layer device, PDCP layer device, RLC layer device, or MAC layer device) of each bearer. indicator or PDCP data recovery indicator or RLC re-establishment indicator or MAC part initialization indicator or MAC initialization indicator or indicator triggering a new operation)

- In the above case, if the dual access technology or cell group (eg, secondary cell group) or cell is set, added, activated, restarted, changed, or reset, if the setting information or indicator is included, the first An indicator (eg, mobilityControlInfor or ReconfigurationWithSync) may also be included. However, in the case of including setting information or indicators for disabling, inactivating, resetting, or stopping the dual access technology or cell group (eg, secondary cell group) or cell, the first indicator (eg, secondary cell group) For example, mobilityControlInfor or ReconfigurationWithSync) may not be included. In the above, the first indicator may be an indicator for triggering a random access procedure to the cell group or cell, or an indicator for synchronizing a signal with a new cell, or an indicator for instructing a frequency movement of a terminal. , or may be an indicator indicating a change in cell group (or cell). As another method, the terminal may perform PDCCH monitoring in the cell group or cell indicated or configured above, and trigger and perform a random access procedure as indicated by the PDCCH. For example, an upper layer device (eg, RRC layer device) may send an indicator for triggering a random access procedure to a lower layer device (eg, MAC layer device).

- Random access in the case of including setting information or indicators for setting, adding, activating, resuming, changing, or resetting a dual access technology or cell group (eg, secondary cell group) or cell. You can also include configuration information. However, the random access setting information may not be included in the above case where setting information or indicators for releasing, inactivating, resetting, or stopping a dual access technology or cell group (eg, secondary cell group) or cell are included. can The random access configuration information may include random access transmission resource information (time or frequency transmission resource) or designated preamble information for preamble transmission for the cell group or cell.

- time information (eg, secondary cell group) or cell (PSCell or SCG SCell) indicating when to activate or resume or deactivate or suspend the dual access technology or cell group (eg secondary cell group) or cell (PSCell or SCG SCell); Information indicating timing (eg, X), time unit, subframe or time slot, or symbol unit, for example, whether to activate a cell at n+X th if the message is received at n th time unit or time information indicating whether to resume or disable or stop)

- First channel measurement setting information for each cell or partial bandwidth

-Secondary channel measurement setting information for each cell or partial bandwidth

- An indicator for adding cell group settings or an indicator for changing cell groups (ReconfigurationWithSync) or an indicator for random access procedures (ReconfigurationWithSync or a newly defined indicator)

- An indicator instructing whether to activate the cell group by performing a random access procedure when activating a cell group or activating a cell group without a random access procedure (ReconfigurationWithSync or a newly defined indicator)

- RRM (radio resource management) setting information or frequency measurement setting information or separate RRM (radio resource management) setting information or frequency measurement setting information to be applied or performed when a cell group is deactivated (eg, battery saving Simplified frequency measurement setting information (Reduced or Relaxed RRM setting information)

- Configuration information for radio link monitoring (RLM) or configuration information for RLM to be applied or performed when a cell group is deactivated. For example, when a cell group is deactivated, configuration information of beams in units of cells to be measured by the terminal or configuration information of beams for each partial bandwidth, and beam-related configuration information (transmission configuration indication (TCI) state or quasi co-location (QCL)) May include or a timing advance (TA) value (or offset value) for synchronizing the downlink signal of the base station or the uplink signal of the base station or a timer indicating the validity of the TA value (TAT, time alignment timer) Alternatively, it may include a timer value (TAT value), or SSB (synchronization signal block) setting information or CSI-RS (channel state information reference signal) setting information or RS (reference signal) setting information or beam to be measured. When a failure occurs, transmission resource information (eg, PUCCH configuration information (eg, SR (scheduling request) information or specific transmission resources) or frequency transmission resources or time transmission resources) capable of reporting a result may be included. can In addition, the setting information may include partial bandwidth setting information (eg, indicated by a partial bandwidth identifier) indicating in which partial bandwidth the RLM procedure is to be performed. Alternatively, when the cell group state is inactive, the UE activates the cell group by performing the RLM procedure in the first active partial bandwidth (or first active downlink partial bandwidth, firstActiveDownlinkBWP-ID) set in the RRC message. The first activation partial bandwidth to be activated at the time of activation may be monitored early to minimize the cell group activation delay. As another method, when the cell group state is set to the inactive state (or active state), the terminal performs the RLM procedure in the last (or previously) activated partial bandwidth before the cell group state becomes inactive, It is also possible to keep the connection with the cell group continuously (for example, when partial bandwidth setting information indicating which partial bandwidth to perform the RLM procedure is not set) or when activating the cell group, RRC message The activation procedure may be performed in the first active partial bandwidth (or first active downlink partial bandwidth, firstActiveDownlinkBWP-ID) set in If the partial bandwidth-related setting information indicating in which partial bandwidth to perform the RLM procedure is not set when activating the cell group, the RLM procedure may be performed in the last (or previously) activated partial bandwidth. there is. In addition, the setting information may include beam-related setting information (eg, a partial bandwidth identifier, TCI state, or QCL setting information) indicating which beam to perform the RLM procedure on. . Alternatively, when the cell group state is inactive, the terminal performs the RLM procedure on the beam (eg, TCI state or QCL configuration information) set in the RRC message or activates the beam and performs the RLM procedure , when activating a cell group, a beam to be activated may be monitored early to minimize cell group activation delay. As another method, when the cell group state is set to the inactive state (or active state), the terminal performs the RLM procedure on the last (or previously) activated beam before the cell group state becomes inactive, so that the cell group (For example, when beam-related setting information indicating which beam to perform the RLM procedure is not set) or when activating a cell group, the beam set in the RRC message can be used to perform the activation procedure. If beam-related configuration information indicating which beam to perform the RLM procedure is not set when activating the cell group, the RLM procedure may be performed on the last (or previously) activated beam.

- Configuration information for a beam failure detection procedure or beam failure detection (BFD) or configuration information for BFD to be applied or performed when a cell group is deactivated. For example, when a cell group is deactivated, configuration information of beams in units of cells to be measured by the UE or configuration information of beams for each partial bandwidth, and beam-related configuration information (transmission configuration indication (TCI) state or quasi co-location (QCL)) May include or a timing advance (TA) value (or offset value) for synchronizing the downlink signal of the base station or the uplink signal of the base station or a timer indicating the validity of the TA value (TAT, time alignment timer) Alternatively, it may include a timer value (TAT value), or SSB (synchronization signal block) setting information or CSI-RS (channel state information reference signal) setting information or RS (reference signal) setting information or beam to be measured. When a failure occurs, transmission resource information (eg, PUCCH configuration information (eg, SR (scheduling request) information or specific transmission resources) or frequency transmission resources or time transmission resources) capable of reporting a result may be included. can In addition, the setting information may include partial bandwidth setting information (for example, indicated by a partial bandwidth identifier) indicating in which partial bandwidth the beam failure detection procedure is to be performed. As another method, when the cell group state is inactive, the UE performs a beam failure detection procedure in the first active partial bandwidth (or first active downlink partial bandwidth, firstActiveDownlinkBWP-ID) set in the RRC message, so that the cell group When activating the cell group activation delay, it is possible to minimize the cell group activation delay by early monitoring the initial activation partial bandwidth to be activated. As another method, when the cell group state is set to the inactive state (or active state), the terminal performs a beam failure detection procedure in the last (or previously) activated partial bandwidth before the cell group state becomes inactive. (For example, when partial bandwidth setting information indicating in which partial bandwidth the beam failure detection procedure is to be performed is not set) or to activate the cell group When doing so, the activation procedure may be performed in the first active partial bandwidth (or first active downlink partial bandwidth, firstActiveDownlinkBWP-ID) set in the RRC message. If the partial bandwidth-related setting information indicating in which partial bandwidth the beam failure detection procedure is to be performed is not set when the cell group is activated, the beam failure detection procedure is performed in the last (or previously) activated partial bandwidth. you might as well make it work. In addition, the setting information includes beam-related setting information (eg, a partial bandwidth identifier, TCI state, or QCL setting information) indicating which beam to perform the beam failure detection procedure on. can As another method, when the cell group state is inactive, the UE performs a beam failure detection procedure on the beam (eg, TCI state or QCL configuration information) set in the RRC message, so that when activating the cell group, The cell group activation delay can be minimized by early monitoring of the beam to be performed. As another method, when the cell group state is set to the inactive state (or active state), the terminal performs a beam failure detection procedure on the last (or previously) activated beam before the cell group state becomes inactive, It is also possible to keep the connection with the cell group continuously (for example, when beam-related configuration information indicating which beam to perform the beam failure detection procedure is not set) or when activating the cell group, RRC The activation procedure can be performed on the beam set in the message. If beam-related configuration information indicating which beam to perform the beam failure detection procedure is not set when activating a cell group, the beam failure detection procedure is performed on the last (or previously) activated beam. may be

In the above, when the terminal receives the second RRC message (1k-20), the terminal reads and confirms the second RRC message, or information included in the second RRC message (eg, the second RRC The first RRC message included in the message) is read, and the terminal can configure, add, change, resume, stop, or deactivate a dual access technology or cell group (eg, secondary cell group) . In addition, if the first indicator for triggering the random access procedure is included in the second RRC message or the first RRC message, the random access procedure can be triggered for the cell group or cell set or indicated above. When performing the random access procedure above, if there is random access information in the RRC message or if there is stored random access information, based on the random access information stored or received in the RRC message or system information, An access procedure (eg, non-contention-based random access procedure (eg, 4-step random access or 2-step random access) may be performed. If there is no random access information in the RRC message, the random access procedure (eg, 4-step random access or 2-step random access) For example, a contention-based random access procedure (eg, 4-step random access or 2-step random access) may be performed. In another method, the UE may perform the PDCCH in the cell group or cell indicated or configured above. Monitoring may be performed, and a random access procedure may be triggered and performed as directed by the PDCCH For example, an upper layer device (eg, RRC layer device) may perform a lower layer device (eg, MAC layer device) may send an indicator triggering a random access procedure.

Hereinafter, a first embodiment of operation of a terminal considering dual access technology configuration information when receiving an RRC message (eg, RRCReconfiguration message) is proposed. The above embodiment proposes a procedure for enabling a UE to activate a cell group without a random access procedure (RACH less activation) when activating a cell group, adding a cell group, or changing a cell group.

- If the terminal receives the RRCReconfiguration message, the terminal may perform the following procedure.

- 1> If MCG (or MN (Master Node)) is set to LTE (E-UTRA) and SCG (or SN (Secondary Node) is set to NR (ie, E-UTRA nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig is set If) or if the terminal is set to (NG)EN-DC (Next Generation E-UTRA NR - Dual connectivity connected to 5GC)

■ 2> If the RRCReconfiguration message is received through the E-UTRA RRC message in the MobilityFromNRCommand message (a message indicating handover from NR to (NG)EN-DC)

◆ 3> In the above message, if the reconfigurationWithSync setting information is included in the SCG's spCellConfig or if the SCG's cell group status is not set to an inactive state

● 4> The UE may perform (or trigger or start) a random access procedure for SpCell (or SCG or PSCell).

● 4> If set (or instructed) to activate a cell group (eg, secondary cell group) in the above (or if the state of the cell group is not set to an inactive state in the above), the terminal initializes the MAC layer device (MAC reset). In the above, the MAC layer device initialization (MAC reset) procedure is performed after the terminal determines whether or not to perform the random access procedure, or after triggering the random access procedure, or when the random access procedure is successfully completed (or after completion), or the random access procedure It may also be performed when the cellgroup is activated without a random access procedure or when the cellgroup is successfully activated without a random access procedure (eg, PDCCH successful reception or transmission resource reception). This is because, when activating a cell group, if the MAC layer device is initialized first, the TAT (TimeAlignmentTimer) timer associated with the PTAG (or PSCell) is considered to have expired, and thus activating the cell group without the random access procedure proposed in the present disclosure. This is because the procedure cannot be performed (that is, the cell group can be activated without the random access procedure only when the TAT timer is running). Alternatively, a partial MAC reset of the MAC layer device may be performed instead of the MAC layer device initialization procedure. In the following of the present disclosure, the MAC layer device initialization procedure or the partial initialization procedure of the MAC layer device will be described in detail.

◆ 3> Otherwise, if (else if) the cell group state of the SCG is not set to an inactive state or if a new indicator (eg RACH-less indication) is included in the message and instructed not to perform the random access procedure Or, in the above message, if reconfigurationWithSync configuration information is not included in SCG's spCellConfig

● 4> The UE may not perform (or trigger or start) a random access procedure for SpCell (or SCG or PSCell).

● 4> The UE can activate the SpCell without a random access procedure or start monitoring the PDCCH for the SpCell or start receiving the PDSCH.

● 4> If set (or instructed) to activate a cell group (eg, secondary cell group) in the above (or if the state of the cell group is not set to an inactive state in the above), the terminal initializes the MAC layer device (MAC reset). In the above, the MAC layer device initialization (MAC reset) procedure is performed after the terminal determines whether or not to perform the random access procedure, or after triggering the random access procedure, or when the random access procedure is successfully completed (or after completion), or the random access procedure It may also be performed when the cellgroup is activated without a random access procedure or when the cellgroup is successfully activated without a random access procedure (eg, PDCCH successful reception or transmission resource reception). This is because, when activating a cell group, if the MAC layer device is initialized first, the TAT (TimeAlignmentTimer) timer associated with the PTAG (or PSCell) is considered to have expired, and thus activating the cell group without the random access procedure proposed in the present disclosure. This is because the procedure cannot be performed (that is, the cell group can be activated without the random access procedure only when the TAT timer is running). Alternatively, a partial MAC reset of the MAC layer device may be performed instead of the MAC layer device initialization procedure. In the following of the present disclosure, the MAC layer device initialization procedure or the partial initialization procedure of the MAC layer device will be described in detail.

◆ 3> otherwise (else)

● 4> Ends the procedure performed by the terminal.

-1> If MCG (or MN (Master Node)) is set to NR and SCG (or SN (Secondary Node) is set to NR (ie, E-UTRA nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig is set) or if the terminal If it is set to NR-DC (NR-Dual connectivity connected to 5GC) or if an RRCReconfiguration message is received from nr-SCG of mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup configuration information through SRB1, or if the mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup configuration information is received in RRCReconfiguration or RRCResume message through SRB1 if received

■ 2> In the above message, if reconfigurationWithSync setting information is included in spCellConfig of nr-SCG or if the cell group status of the SCG is not set to an inactive state

◆ 3> The UE may perform (or trigger or start) a random access procedure for SpCell (or SCG or PSCell).

◆ 3> If set (or instructed) to activate a cell group (eg, secondary cell group) in the above (or if the state of the cell group is not set to an inactive state in the above), the terminal initializes the MAC layer device (MAC reset). In the above, the MAC layer device initialization (MAC reset) procedure is performed after the terminal determines whether or not to perform the random access procedure, or after triggering the random access procedure, or when the random access procedure is successfully completed (or after completion), or the random access procedure It may also be performed when the cellgroup is activated without a random access procedure or when the cellgroup is successfully activated without a random access procedure (for example, PDCCH successful reception or transmission resource reception). This is because, when activating a cell group, if the MAC layer device is initialized first, the TAT (TimeAlignmentTimer) timer associated with the PTAG (or PSCell) is considered to have expired, and thus activating the cell group without the random access procedure proposed in the present disclosure. This is because the procedure cannot be performed (that is, the cell group can be activated without the random access procedure only when the TAT timer is running). Alternatively, a partial MAC reset of the MAC layer device may be performed instead of the MAC layer device initialization procedure. In the following of the present disclosure, the MAC layer device initialization procedure or the partial initialization procedure of the MAC layer device will be described in detail.

■ 2> Otherwise, if (else if) the cell group state of the SCG is not set to an inactive state or if a new indicator (eg RACH-less indication) is included in the message and instructed not to perform the random access procedure Or, in the above message, if reconfigurationWithSync configuration information is not included in SCG's spCellConfig

◆ 3> The UE may not perform (or trigger or start) a random access procedure for SpCell (or SCG or PSCell).

◆ 3> The UE can activate the SpCell without a random access procedure, or start monitoring the PDCCH for the SpCell, or start receiving the PDSCH.

◆ 3> If set (or instructed) to activate a cell group (eg, secondary cell group) in the above (or if the state of the cell group is not set to an inactive state in the above), the terminal initializes the MAC layer device (MAC reset). In the above, the MAC layer device initialization (MAC reset) procedure is performed after the terminal determines whether or not to perform the random access procedure, or after triggering the random access procedure, or when the random access procedure is successfully completed (or after completion), or the random access procedure It may also be performed when the cellgroup is activated without a random access procedure or when the cellgroup is successfully activated without a random access procedure (eg, PDCCH successful reception or transmission resource reception). This is because, when activating a cell group, if the MAC layer device is initialized first, the TAT (TimeAlignmentTimer) timer associated with the PTAG (or PSCell) is considered to have expired, and thus activating the cell group without the random access procedure proposed in the present disclosure. This is because the procedure cannot be performed (that is, the cell group can be activated without the random access procedure only when the TAT timer is running). Alternatively, a partial MAC reset of the MAC layer device may be performed instead of the MAC layer device initialization procedure. In the following of the present invention, the MAC layer device initialization procedure or the partial initialization procedure of the MAC layer device will be described in detail.

■ 2> otherwise (else)

◆ 3> End the procedure of the terminal.

- 1> In the above message, if reconfigurationWithSync configuration information is included in spCellConfig of MCG or SCG and if the MAC layer device of the NR cell group successfully completes the random access procedure triggered above

■ 2> The first timer T304 for the cell group can be stopped (or if the timer is running).

■ 2> The second timer T310 for the cell group or source SpCell may be stopped (or if the timer is running).

- When reconfigurationWithSync is included in the message and the terminal performs a resetting procedure (reconfiguration with Sync) to match synchronization, the following procedure can be performed.

- 1> If a DAPS (dual active protocol stack) bearer is not configured or if the cell group (or SCG) status is not set to an inactive state, RLM-related configuration or beam failure detection-related configuration information for the inactive cell group is configured If not (if the state of the cell group is set to inactive state, keep the second timer running and perform the RLM procedure to support fast cell group activation) or the cell group (or SCG) in which this procedure is inactive unless it is performed for

■ 2> The second timer T310 for the cell group or SpCell may be stopped (or if the timer is running).

- 1> The third timer T312 for the cell group or SpCell may be stopped (or if the timer is running).

- 1> unless the status of the cell group (or SCG) is set to inactive or if this procedure is not performed for a cell group (or SCG) that is inactive

■ 2> The first timer T304 for the SpCell (PCell of MCG or PSCell of SCG) can be started by setting the value of the first timer T304 included in the reconfigurationWithSync setting information of the message.

- As suggested in the present disclosure, if RLM-related configuration information or beam status detection-related configuration information is set for an inactive cell group (or SCG) in an RRC message (eg, RRCReconfiguration message), the terminal wirelessly connects as follows A failure (radio link failure) detection procedure may be performed.

■ 1> If the cell group state is set to the inactive state (or if the beam failure detection procedure or the RLM procedure is set for the inactive cell group) or if synchronization is established for SpCell a predetermined number of times (eg, N310 value) If an indication that it is not correct is received from a lower layer device

◆ A second timer (T310) for the SpCell may be started. (The second timer may be activated when the cell group state is activated (or set to active or not set to inactive) or for the SpCell. When starting or performing the random access procedure, if the second timer is running, it may be stopped, and if the second timer expires, it may be declared that radio connection failure has occurred for the cell group.)

■ 1> If a certain DAPS bearer is established or if an indication of not being synchronized with the source SpCell is received from the lower layer device a predetermined number of times (eg, N310 value) or if the first timer is running

◆ A second timer (T310) for the source SpCell can be started.

■ 1> If an indication that SpCell is not synchronized is received from a lower layer device a predetermined number of times (eg, N310 value) or if the first timer T304 or the fourth timer is not running

◆ A second timer (T310) for the source SpCell can be started.

Hereinafter, a second embodiment of operation of a terminal considering dual access technology configuration information when receiving an RRC message (eg, an RRCReconfiguration message) is proposed. The above embodiment proposes a procedure for enabling a UE to activate a cell group without a random access procedure (RACH less activation) when activating a cell group, adding a cell group, or changing a cell group.

- If the terminal receives the RRCReconfiguration message, the terminal may perform the following procedure.

- 1> If MCG (or MN (Master Node)) is set to LTE (E-UTRA) and SCG (or SN (Secondary Node) is set to NR (ie, E-UTRA nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig is set If) or if the terminal is set to (NG)EN-DC (Next Generation E-UTRA NR - Dual connectivity connected to 5GC)

■ 2> If the RRCReconfiguration message is received through the E-UTRA RRC message in the MobilityFromNRCommand message (a message indicating handover from NR to (NG)EN-DC)

◆ 3> In the above message, if the reconfigurationWithSync setting information is included in spCellConfig of SCG, or if the cell group state of the SCG is not set to an inactive state, or if the TAT (TimeAlignmentTimer) timer running in the MAC layer device (between the terminal and the base station) If the timer that determines the validity of the TA (Timing Advance) value for synchronization is not running (or if it has expired or if an indication that it has expired is received from the lower layer device), or if an indication that beam failure has been detected is received from the lower layer If it is received from the device (or if a beam failure occurs or if a beam failure detection procedure for an inactive cell group, or if an RLM procedure is not set or if a radio connection failure procedure is detected in the RLM procedure (or the second timer T310) has expired or if the radio connection with the SCG is invalid)

● 4> The UE may perform (or trigger or start) a random access procedure for SpCell (or SCG or PSCell).

● 4> If set (or instructed) to activate a cell group (eg, secondary cell group) in the above (or if the state of the cell group is not set to an inactive state in the above), the terminal initializes the MAC layer device (MAC reset). In the above, the MAC layer device initialization (MAC reset) procedure is performed after the terminal determines whether or not to perform the random access procedure, or after triggering the random access procedure, or when the random access procedure is successfully completed (or after completion), or the random access procedure It may also be performed when the cellgroup is activated without a random access procedure or when the cellgroup is successfully activated without a random access procedure (eg, PDCCH successful reception or transmission resource reception). This is because, when activating a cell group, if the MAC layer device is initialized first, the TAT (TimeAlignmentTimer) timer associated with the PTAG (or PSCell) is considered to have expired, and thus activating the cell group without the random access procedure proposed in the present disclosure. This is because the procedure cannot be performed (that is, the cell group can be activated without the random access procedure only when the TAT timer is running). Alternatively, a partial MAC reset of the MAC layer device may be performed instead of the MAC layer device initialization procedure. In the following of the present disclosure, the MAC layer device initialization procedure or the partial initialization procedure of the MAC layer device will be described in detail.

◆ 3> Otherwise, if (else if), the cell group state of the SCG is not set to an inactive state, or a new indicator (eg RACH-less indication) is included in the message so that the random access procedure is not performed. If it is indicated, or if the TAT (TimeAlignmentTimer) timer (a timer that determines the validity of the TA (Timing Advance) value for synchronizing the terminal and the base station) running in the MAC layer device is running (or has not expired, or has expired) If an indication has not been received from the lower layer device), or if an indication that beam failure detection has occurred has not been received from the lower layer device (or if beam failure has not occurred), or a beam failure detection procedure or RLM procedure for a deactivated cell group is set, or if a radio connection failure procedure is not detected in the RLM procedure (or if the second timer (T310) has not expired or if the radio connection of the SCG is valid), or if the reconfigurationWithSync configuration information in the above message is the SCG If not included in spCellConfig,

● 4> The UE may not perform (or trigger or start) a random access procedure for SpCell (or SCG or PSCell).

● 4> The UE can activate the SpCell without a random access procedure or start monitoring the PDCCH for the SpCell or start receiving the PDSCH.

● 4> If set (or instructed) to activate a cell group (eg, secondary cell group) in the above (or if the state of the cell group is not set to an inactive state in the above), the terminal initializes the MAC layer device (MAC reset). In the above, the MAC layer device initialization (MAC reset) procedure is performed after the terminal determines whether or not to perform the random access procedure, or after triggering the random access procedure, or when the random access procedure is successfully completed (or after completion), or the random access procedure It may also be performed when the cellgroup is activated without a random access procedure or when the cellgroup is successfully activated without a random access procedure (eg, PDCCH successful reception or transmission resource reception). This is because, when activating a cell group, if the MAC layer device is initialized first, the TAT (TimeAlignmentTimer) timer associated with the PTAG (or PSCell) is considered to have expired, and thus activating the cell group without the random access procedure proposed in the present disclosure. This is because the procedure cannot be performed (that is, the cell group can be activated without the random access procedure only when the TAT timer is running). Alternatively, a partial MAC reset of the MAC layer device may be performed instead of the MAC layer device initialization procedure. In the following of the present disclosure, the MAC layer device initialization procedure or the partial initialization procedure of the MAC layer device will be described in detail.

◆ 3> Otherwise, if the cell group state of the SCG is not set to an inactive state, or a new indicator (eg, RACH-less indication) is included in the message, the random access procedure is not performed. If it is instructed not to, or if the TAT (TimeAlignmentTimer) timer (a timer that determines the validity of the TA (Timing Advance) value for synchronizing the terminal and the base station) running in the MAC layer device is not running (or has expired, or has expired) is received from the lower layer device), or if an indication that beam failure detection has been received from the lower layer device (or if beam failure has occurred), or if the beam failure detection procedure or RLM procedure for the inactive cell group is set If not, or if a radio connection failure procedure is detected in the RLM procedure (or if the second timer (T310) expires or if the radio connection with the SCG is not valid), or if the reconfigurationWithSync configuration information in the above message is set to SCG's spCellConfig if not included

● 4> The UE may perform (or trigger or start) a random access procedure for SpCell (or SCG or PSCell).

● 4> If set (or instructed) to activate a cell group (eg, secondary cell group) in the above (or if the state of the cell group is not set to an inactive state in the above), the terminal initializes the MAC layer device (MAC reset). In the above, the MAC layer device initialization (MAC reset) procedure is performed after the terminal determines whether or not to perform the random access procedure, or after triggering the random access procedure, or when the random access procedure is successfully completed (or after completion), or the random access procedure It may also be performed when the cellgroup is activated without a random access procedure or when the cellgroup is successfully activated without a random access procedure (eg, PDCCH successful reception or transmission resource reception). This is because, when activating a cell group, if the MAC layer device is initialized first, the TAT (TimeAlignmentTimer) timer associated with the PTAG (or PSCell) is considered to have expired, and thus activating the cell group without the random access procedure proposed in the present disclosure. This is because the procedure cannot be performed (that is, the cell group can be activated without the random access procedure only when the TAT timer is running). Alternatively, a partial MAC reset of the MAC layer device may be performed instead of the MAC layer device initialization procedure. In the following of the present disclosure, the MAC layer device initialization procedure or the partial initialization procedure of the MAC layer device will be described in detail.

◆ 3> otherwise (else)

● 4> Ends the procedure performed by the terminal.

- 1> If the terminal has MCG (or MN (Master Node)) set to NR and SCG (or SN (Secondary Node) set to NR (ie, E-UTRA nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig is set), or terminal is set to NR-DC (NR-Dual connectivity connected to 5GC), or if an RRCReconfiguration message is received from nr-SCG of mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup configuration information through SRB1, or if the mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup configuration information is RRCReconfiguration through SRB1 or If received in RRCResume message,

■ 2> In the above message, if reconfigurationWithSync setting information is included in spCellConfig of nr-SCG, or if the cell group state of the SCG is not set to an inactive state, or if the TAT (TimeAlignmentTimer) timer (terminal and If the timer that determines the validity of the TA (Timing Advance) value for synchronizing base stations is not running (or if it has expired or if an indication that it has expired is received from a lower layer device), or if an indication that beam failure has been detected If it is received from a lower layer device (or if beam failure occurs), or if the beam failure detection procedure or RLM procedure for the inactive cell group is not set, or if a radio connection failure procedure is detected in the RLM procedure (or if the second If the timer T310 has expired or if the radio connection with the SCG is not valid),

◆ 3> The UE may perform (or trigger or start) a random access procedure for SpCell (or SCG or PSCell).

◆ 3> If set (or instructed) to activate a cell group (eg, secondary cell group) in the above (or if the state of the cell group is not set to an inactive state in the above), the terminal initializes the MAC layer device (MAC reset). In the above, the MAC layer device initialization (MAC reset) procedure is performed after the terminal determines whether or not to perform the random access procedure, or after triggering the random access procedure, or when the random access procedure is successfully completed (or after completion), or the random access procedure It may also be performed when the cellgroup is activated without a random access procedure or when the cellgroup is successfully activated without a random access procedure (eg, PDCCH successful reception or transmission resource reception). This is because, when activating a cell group, if the MAC layer device is initialized first, the TAT (TimeAlignmentTimer) timer associated with the PTAG (or PSCell) is considered to have expired, and thus activating the cell group without the random access procedure proposed in the present disclosure. This is because the procedure cannot be performed (that is, the cell group can be activated without the random access procedure only when the TAT timer is running). Alternatively, a partial MAC reset of the MAC layer device may be performed instead of the MAC layer device initialization procedure. In the following of the present disclosure, the MAC layer device initialization procedure or the partial initialization procedure of the MAC layer device will be described in detail.

■ 2> Otherwise, if (else if), the cell group state of the SCG is not set to an inactive state, or a new indicator (eg RACH-less indication) is included in the message so that the random access procedure is not performed. If it is indicated, or if the TAT (TimeAlignmentTimer) timer (a timer that determines the validity of the TA (Timing Advance) value for synchronizing the terminal and the base station) running in the MAC layer device is running (or has not expired, or has expired) If an indication has not been received from the lower layer device), or if an indication that beam failure detection has occurred has not been received from the lower layer device (or if beam failure has not occurred), or a beam failure detection procedure or RLM procedure for a deactivated cell group is set, or if the reconfigurationWithSync configuration information is not included in the spCellConfig of the SCG in the above message, or if the radio connection failure procedure is not detected in the RLM procedure (or if the second timer (T310) has not expired or if the radio connection with the SCG has not expired) if the connection is valid),

◆ 3> The UE may not perform (or trigger or start) a random access procedure for SpCell (or SCG or PSCell).

◆ 3> The UE can activate the SpCell without a random access procedure, or start monitoring the PDCCH for the SpCell, or start receiving the PDSCH.

◆ 3> If set (or instructed) to activate a cell group (eg, secondary cell group) in the above (or if the state of the cell group is not set to an inactive state in the above), the terminal initializes the MAC layer device (MAC reset). In the above, the MAC layer device initialization (MAC reset) procedure is performed after the terminal determines whether or not to perform the random access procedure, or after triggering the random access procedure, or when the random access procedure is successfully completed (or after completion), or the random access procedure It may also be performed when the cellgroup is activated without a random access procedure or when the cellgroup is successfully activated without a random access procedure (eg, PDCCH successful reception or transmission resource reception). This is because, when activating a cell group, if the MAC layer device is initialized first, the TAT (TimeAlignmentTimer) timer associated with the PTAG (or PSCell) is considered to have expired, and thus activating the cell group without the random access procedure proposed in the present disclosure. This is because the procedure cannot be performed (that is, the cell group can be activated without the random access procedure only when the TAT timer is running). Alternatively, a partial MAC reset of the MAC layer device may be performed instead of the MAC layer device initialization procedure. In the following of the present disclosure, the MAC layer device initialization procedure or the partial initialization procedure of the MAC layer device will be described in detail.

■ 2> Otherwise, if (else if) the cell group state of the SCG is not set to an inactive state, or a new indicator (eg RACH-less indication) is included in the message to instruct not to perform the random access procedure or if the TAT (TimeAlignmentTimer) timer (timer for determining the validity of the TA (Timing Advance) value for synchronizing the terminal and the base station) running in the MAC layer device is not running (or expired, or indicates that it has expired) received from the lower layer device) or if an indication that beam failure detection has been received from the lower layer device (or if beam failure has occurred), or if the beam failure detection procedure or RLM procedure for the inactive cell group is not set, Or if a radio connection failure procedure is detected in the RLM procedure (or if the second timer (T310) expires or if the radio connection with the SCG is invalid), or if reconfigurationWithSync configuration information is not included in the spCellConfig of the SCG in the above message ,

◆ 3> The UE may perform (or trigger or start) a random access procedure for SpCell (or SCG or PSCell).

◆ 3> If set (or instructed) to activate a cell group (eg, secondary cell group) in the above (or if the state of the cell group is not set to an inactive state in the above), the terminal initializes the MAC layer device (MAC reset). In the above, the MAC layer device initialization (MAC reset) procedure is performed after the terminal determines whether or not to perform the random access procedure, or after triggering the random access procedure, or when the random access procedure is successfully completed (or after completion), or the random access procedure It may also be performed when the cellgroup is activated without a random access procedure or when the cellgroup is successfully activated without a random access procedure (eg, PDCCH successful reception or transmission resource reception). This is because, when activating a cell group, if the MAC layer device is initialized first, the TAT (TimeAlignmentTimer) timer associated with the PTAG (or PSCell) is considered to have expired, and thus activating the cell group without the random access procedure proposed in the present disclosure. This is because the procedure cannot be performed (that is, the cell group can be activated without the random access procedure only when the TAT timer is running). Alternatively, a partial MAC reset of the MAC layer device may be performed instead of the MAC layer device initialization procedure. In the following of the present disclosure, the MAC layer device initialization procedure or the partial initialization procedure of the MAC layer device will be described in detail.

■ 2> otherwise (else)

◆ 3> End the procedure of the terminal.

- 1> In the above message, if reconfigurationWithSync configuration information is included in spCellConfig of MCG or SCG and if the MAC layer device of the NR cell group successfully completes the random access procedure triggered above

■ 2> The first timer T304 for the cell group can be stopped (or if the timer is running).

■ 2> The second timer T310 for the cell group or source SpCell may be stopped (or if the timer is running).

- When reconfigurationWithSync is included in the message and the terminal performs a resetting procedure (reconfiguration with Sync) to match synchronization, the following procedure can be performed.

- 1> If a dual active protocol stack (DAPS) bearer is not established, or if the state of a cell group (or SCG) is not set to an inactive state, or RLM-related configuration or beam failure detection-related configuration information for an inactive cell group is not set (if the state of the cell group is set to the inactive state, the second timer is continuously driven and the RLM procedure is performed to support fast cell group activation), or the cell group in which this procedure is inactivated ( or SCG),

■ 2> The second timer T310 for the cell group or SpCell may be stopped (or if the timer is running).

- 1> The third timer T312 for the cell group or SpCell may be stopped (or if the timer is running).

- 1> If the state of the cell group (or SCG) is not set to inactive state, or if this procedure is not performed for the inactive cell group (or SCG),

■ 2> The first timer T304 for the SpCell (PCell of MCG or PSCell of SCG) can be started by setting the value of the first timer T304 included in the reconfigurationWithSync setting information of the message.

- As suggested in the present disclosure, if RLM-related configuration information or beam status detection-related configuration information is set for a cell group (or SCG) deactivated in an RRC message (eg, RRCReconfiguration message), the terminal radios as follows A radio link failure detection procedure may be performed.

■ 1> If the cell group state is set to the inactive state (or if the beam failure detection procedure or the RLM procedure is set for the inactive cell group), or for SpCell a predetermined number of times (eg, N310 value) If an indication that the synchronization is not correct is received from the lower layer device,

◆ A second timer (T310) for the SpCell may be started. (The second timer may be activated when the cell group state is activated (or set to activate or not set to deactivate) or to the SpCell. If the second timer is running, it may be stopped (when a random access procedure is started or performed, or when the random access procedure is successfully completed), and if the second timer expires, for the cell group may declare that a radio connection failure has occurred)

■ 1> If a certain DAPS bearer is established, or if an indication that synchronization with the source SpCell is out of sync is received from the lower layer device a predetermined number of times (eg, N310 value), or if the first timer is running ,

◆ A second timer (T310) for the source SpCell can be started.

■ 1> If an indication that SpCell is not synchronized is received from the lower layer device a predetermined number of times (eg, N310 value), or if the first timer T304 or the fourth timer is not running,

◆ A second timer (T310) for the source SpCell can be started.

Hereinafter, a third embodiment of operation of a terminal considering dual access technology configuration information when receiving an RRC message (eg, an RRCReconfiguration message) is proposed. The above embodiment proposes a procedure for enabling a UE to activate a cell group without a random access procedure (RACH less activation) when activating a cell group, adding a cell group, or changing a cell group.

- If the terminal receives the RRCReconfiguration message, the terminal may perform the following procedure.

- 1> If MCG (or MN (Master Node)) is set to LTE (E-UTRA) and SCG (or SN (Secondary Node) is set to NR (ie, E-UTRA nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig is set ), or if the terminal is set to (NG)EN-DC (Next Generation E-UTRA NR - Dual connectivity connected to 5GC),

■ 2> If the RRCReconfiguration message is received through the E-UTRA RRC message in the MobilityFromNRCommand message (a message indicating handover from NR to (NG)EN-DC)

◆ 3> In the above message, if the reconfigurationWithSync setting information is included in spCellConfig of SCG, or if the cell group state of the SCG is not set to an inactive state, or if the TAT (TimeAlignmentTimer) timer running in the MAC layer device (between the terminal and the base station) If the timer that determines the validity of the TA (Timing Advance) value for synchronization is not running (or if it has expired or if an indication that it has expired is received from the lower layer device), or if an indication that beam failure has been detected is received from the lower layer If it is received from the device (or if beam failure occurs), or if the beam failure detection procedure or RLM procedure for the inactive cell group is not set, or if the radio connection failure procedure is detected in the RLM procedure (or the second timer ( T310) has expired or if the radio connection with the SCG is invalid),

● 4> The UE may perform (or trigger or start) a random access procedure for SpCell (or SCG or PSCell).

● 4> If set (or instructed) to activate a cell group (eg, secondary cell group) in the above (or if the state of the cell group is not set to an inactive state in the above), the terminal initializes the MAC layer device (MAC reset). In the above, the MAC layer device initialization (MAC reset) procedure is performed after the terminal determines whether or not to perform the random access procedure, or after triggering the random access procedure, or when the random access procedure is successfully completed (or after completion), or the random access procedure It may also be performed when the cellgroup is activated without a random access procedure or when the cellgroup is successfully activated without a random access procedure (eg, PDCCH successful reception or transmission resource reception). This is because, when activating a cell group, if the MAC layer device is initialized first, the TAT (TimeAlignmentTimer) timer associated with the PTAG (or PSCell) is considered to have expired, and thus activating the cell group without the random access procedure proposed in the present disclosure. This is because the procedure cannot be performed (that is, the cell group can be activated without the random access procedure only when the TAT timer is running). Alternatively, a partial MAC reset of the MAC layer device may be performed instead of the MAC layer device initialization procedure. In the following of the present disclosure, the MAC layer device initialization procedure or the partial initialization procedure of the MAC layer device will be described in detail.

◆ 3> Otherwise, if (else if) the cell group state of the SCG is not set to an inactive state, or a new indicator (eg, RACH-less indication or second reconfigurationWithcSync) is included in the message, random access If it is instructed not to perform the procedure, or if the TAT (TimeAlignmentTimer) timer (a timer that determines the validity of the TA (Timing Advance) value for synchronizing the terminal and the base station) running in the MAC layer device is running (or does not expire) or has not received an indication from the lower layer device that the beam failure has been detected (or has not occurred), or has not received an indication from the lower layer device that beam failure has been detected (or beam failure has not occurred), or beam failure for the inactive cell group. If the detection procedure or the RLM procedure is set, or if the radio connection failure procedure is not detected in the RLM procedure (or if the second timer (T310) has not expired or if the radio connection with the SCG is valid), or in the above message, if reconfigurationWithSync If the configuration information is not included in SCG's spCellConfig,

● 4> The UE may not perform (or trigger or start) a random access procedure for SpCell (or SCG or PSCell).

● 4> The UE can activate the SpCell without a random access procedure or start monitoring the PDCCH for the SpCell or start receiving the PDSCH.

● 4> The terminal may introduce a new fourth timer to check whether or not the SpCell has been successfully activated without the random access procedure. For example, a fourth timer may be started when the above condition is satisfied. The fourth timer may be stopped when the PDCCH or PDSCH is successfully received from the SpCell. If the fourth timer expires, the UE may trigger an SCG failure reporting procedure and report it through the MCG. As another method, when the fourth timer expires, the terminal sets configuration information for a separate random access procedure set in the RRC message or broadcasted in system information (eg, the second reconfigurationWithSync may be set). Alternatively, preamble information, smtc information, or a new terminal identifier (RNTI value) may be set, or a Need code may be set to S and stored and used) based on a random access procedure (contention based random access (CBRA) or CFRA). (contention free random access)) or a two-step random access procedure (two-step RACH) may be performed (ie, it may fall back to the random access procedure). As another method, if the UE fails in a procedure for activating a cell group without a random access procedure (for example, if it does not successfully receive a PDCCH or PDSCH for a certain period of time), it broadcasts in the RRC message or system information A random access procedure (contention based random access (CBRA) or contention free randon access (CFRA)) or two-step random access procedure (two-step RACH) may be performed based on configuration information for a separate random access procedure. (i.e. you can fall back to the random access procedure). The configuration information for the separate random access procedure may be configured when an instruction to deactivate the cell group is transmitted to the terminal as an RRC message, or an instruction (or reconfigurationWithSync) to activate the cell group is transmitted to the terminal as an RRC message. may be set when In the above, whether or not the cellgroup is successfully activated without a random access procedure is determined by, for example, whether the terminal successfully receives a PDCCH from the base station, receives a transmission resource (uplink grant or downlink assignment), or receives an RRC message from the base station. It can be judged to be received.

● 4> If set (or instructed) to activate a cell group (eg, secondary cell group) in the above (or if the state of the cell group is not set to an inactive state in the above), the terminal initializes the MAC layer device (MAC reset). In the above, the MAC layer device initialization (MAC reset) procedure is performed after the terminal determines whether or not to perform the random access procedure, or after triggering the random access procedure, or when the random access procedure is successfully completed (or after completion), or the random access procedure It may also be performed when the cellgroup is activated without a random access procedure or when the cellgroup is successfully activated without a random access procedure (eg, PDCCH successful reception or transmission resource reception). This is because, when activating a cell group, if the MAC layer device is initialized first, the TAT (TimeAlignmentTimer) timer associated with the PTAG (or PSCell) is considered to have expired, and thus activating the cell group without the random access procedure proposed in the present disclosure. This is because the procedure cannot be performed (that is, the cell group can be activated without the random access procedure only when the TAT timer is running). Alternatively, a partial MAC reset of the MAC layer device may be performed instead of the MAC layer device initialization procedure. In the following of the present disclosure, the MAC layer device initialization procedure or the partial initialization procedure of the MAC layer device will be described in detail.

◆ 3> Otherwise, if the cell group state of the SCG is not set to an inactive state, or a new indicator (eg, RACH-less indication) is included in the message, the random access procedure is not performed. If it is instructed not to, or if the TAT (TimeAlignmentTimer) timer (a timer that determines the validity of the TA (timing advance) value for synchronizing the terminal and the base station) running in the MAC layer device is not running (or has expired or has expired) is received from the lower layer device), or if an indication that beam failure detection has been received from the lower layer device (or if beam failure has occurred), or if the beam failure detection procedure or RLM procedure for the inactive cell group is set If not, or if a radio connection failure procedure is detected in the RLM procedure (or if the second timer (T310) expires or if the radio connection with the SCG is not valid), or if the reconfigurationWithSync configuration information in the above message is set to SCG's spCellConfig If not included,

● 4> The UE may perform (or trigger or start) a random access procedure for SpCell (or SCG or PSCell).

● 4> If set (or instructed) to activate a cell group (eg, secondary cell group) in the above (or if the state of the cell group is not set to an inactive state in the above), the terminal initializes the MAC layer device (MAC reset). In the above, the MAC layer device initialization (MAC reset) procedure is performed after the terminal determines whether or not to perform the random access procedure, or after triggering the random access procedure, or when the random access procedure is successfully completed (or after completion), or the random access procedure It may also be performed when the cellgroup is activated without a random access procedure or when the cellgroup is successfully activated without a random access procedure (eg, PDCCH successful reception or transmission resource reception). This is because, when activating a cell group, if the MAC layer device is initialized first, the TAT (TimeAlignmentTimer) timer associated with the PTAG (or PSCell) is considered to have expired, and thus activating the cell group without the random access procedure proposed in the present disclosure. This is because the procedure cannot be performed (that is, the cell group can be activated without the random access procedure only when the TAT timer is running). Alternatively, a partial MAC reset of the MAC layer device may be performed instead of the MAC layer device initialization procedure. In the following of the present disclosure, the MAC layer device initialization procedure or the partial initialization procedure of the MAC layer device will be described in detail.

◆ 3> otherwise (else)

● 4> Ends the procedure performed by the terminal.

- 1> If the terminal has MCG (or MN (Master Node)) set to NR and SCG (or SN (Secondary Node) set to NR (ie, E-UTRA nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig is set), or terminal is set to NR-DC (NR-Dual connectivity connected to 5GC), or if an RRCReconfiguration message is received from nr-SCG of mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup configuration information through SRB1, or if the mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup configuration information is RRCReconfiguration through SRB1 or If received in RRCResume message,

■ 2> In the above message, if reconfigurationWithSync setting information is included in spCellConfig of nr-SCG, or if the cell group state of the SCG is not set to an inactive state, or if the TAT (TimeAlignmentTimer) timer (terminal and If the timer that determines the validity of the TA (Timing Advance) value for synchronizing base stations is not running (or if it has expired or if an indication that it has expired is received from a lower layer device), or if an indication that beam failure has been detected If it is received from a lower layer device (or if beam failure occurs), or if the beam failure detection procedure or RLM procedure for the inactive cell group is not set, or if a radio connection failure procedure is detected in the RLM procedure (or if the second If the timer T310 has expired or if the radio connection with the SCG is not valid),

◆ 3> The UE may perform (or trigger or start) a random access procedure for SpCell (or SCG or PSCell).

◆ 3> If set (or instructed) to activate a cell group (eg, secondary cell group) in the above (or if the state of the cell group is not set to an inactive state in the above), the terminal initializes the MAC layer device (MAC reset). In the above, the MAC layer device initialization (MAC reset) procedure is performed after the terminal determines whether or not to perform the random access procedure, or after triggering the random access procedure, or when the random access procedure is successfully completed (or after completion), or the random access procedure It may also be performed when the cellgroup is activated without a random access procedure or when the cellgroup is successfully activated without a random access procedure (eg, PDCCH successful reception or transmission resource reception). This is because, when activating a cell group, if the MAC layer device is initialized first, the TAT (TimeAlignmentTimer) timer associated with the PTAG (or PSCell) is considered to have expired, and thus activating the cell group without the random access procedure proposed in the present disclosure. This is because the procedure cannot be performed (that is, the cell group can be activated without the random access procedure only when the TAT timer is running). Alternatively, a partial MAC reset of the MAC layer device may be performed instead of the MAC layer device initialization procedure. In the following of the present disclosure, the MAC layer device initialization procedure or the partial initialization procedure of the MAC layer device will be described in detail.

■ 2> Otherwise, if (else if), the cell group state of the SCG is not set to an inactive state, or a new indicator (eg RACH-less indication or second reconfigurationWithcSync) is included in the message and random access If it is instructed not to perform the procedure, or if the TAT (TimeAlignmentTimer) timer (a timer that determines the validity of the TA (Timing Advance) value for synchronizing the terminal and the base station) running in the MAC layer device is running (or does not expire) or has not received an indication from the lower layer device that the beam failure has been detected (or has not occurred), or has not received an indication from the lower layer device that beam failure has been detected (or beam failure has not occurred), or beam failure for the inactive cell group. If the detection procedure or the RLM procedure is set, or if the radio connection failure procedure is not detected in the RLM procedure (or if the second timer (T310) has not expired or if the radio connection with the SCG is valid), or in the above message, if reconfigurationWithSync If the configuration information is not included in SCG's spCellConfig,

◆ 3> The UE may not perform (or trigger or start) a random access procedure for SpCell (or SCG or PSCell).

◆ 3> The UE can activate the SpCell without a random access procedure, or start monitoring the PDCCH for the SpCell, or start receiving the PDSCH.

◆ 3> The terminal may introduce a new fourth timer to check whether or not the SpCell was successfully activated without the random access procedure. For example, a fourth timer may be started when the above condition is satisfied. The fourth timer may be stopped when the PDCCH or PDSCH is successfully received from the SpCell. If the fourth timer expires, the UE may trigger an SCG failure reporting procedure and report it through the MCG. As another method, when the fourth timer expires, the terminal may set information for a separate random access procedure set in the RRC message or broadcast in system information (eg, second reconfigurationWithSync, Alternatively, preamble information, smtc information, or a new terminal identifier (RNTI value) may be set, or a Need code may be set to S and stored and used) based on a random access procedure (contention based random access (CBRA) or CFRA ( contention free random access)) or a two-step random access procedure (two-step RACH) may be performed (ie, it may fall back to the random access procedure). As another method, if the UE fails in a procedure for activating a cell group without a random access procedure (for example, if it does not successfully receive a PDCCH or PDSCH for a certain period of time), it broadcasts in the RRC message or system information A random access procedure (contention based random access (CBRA) or contention free randon access (CFRA)) or two-step random access procedure (two-step RACH) may be performed based on configuration information for a separate random access procedure. (i.e. you can fall back to the random access procedure). The configuration information for the separate random access procedure may be configured when an instruction to deactivate the cell group is transmitted to the terminal as an RRC message, or an instruction (or reconfigurationWithSync) to activate the cell group is transmitted to the terminal as an RRC message. may be set when

◆ 3> If set (or instructed) to activate a cell group (eg, secondary cell group) in the above (or if the state of the cell group is not set to an inactive state in the above), the terminal initializes the MAC layer device (MAC reset). In the above, the MAC layer device initialization (MAC reset) procedure is performed after the terminal determines whether or not to perform the random access procedure, or after triggering the random access procedure, or when the random access procedure is successfully completed (or after completion), or the random access procedure It may also be performed when the cellgroup is activated without a random access procedure or when the cellgroup is successfully activated without a random access procedure (eg, PDCCH successful reception or transmission resource reception). This is because, when activating a cell group, if the MAC layer device is initialized first, the TAT (TimeAlignmentTimer) timer associated with the PTAG (or PSCell) is considered to have expired, and thus activating the cell group without the random access procedure proposed in the present disclosure. This is because the procedure cannot be performed (that is, the cell group can be activated without the random access procedure only when the TAT timer is running). Alternatively, a partial MAC reset of the MAC layer device may be performed instead of the MAC layer device initialization procedure. In the following of the present disclosure, the MAC layer device initialization procedure or the partial initialization procedure of the MAC layer device will be described in detail.

■ 2> Otherwise, if (else if), the cell group state of the SCG is not set to an inactive state, or a new indicator (eg RACH-less indication) is included in the message so that the random access procedure is not performed. If it is indicated, or if the TAT (TimeAlignmentTimer) timer (a timer that determines the validity of the TA (Timing Advance) value for synchronizing the terminal and the base station) running in the MAC layer device is not running (or has expired, or has expired) If an instruction is received from a lower layer device), or if an indication that beam failure detection has occurred is received from a lower layer device (or if a beam failure has occurred), or if a beam failure detection procedure or RLM procedure for a deactivated cell group is not set or if a radio connection failure procedure is detected in the RLM procedure (or if the second timer (T310) expires or if the radio connection with the SCG is not valid), or if the reconfigurationWithSync configuration information is included in the spCellConfig of the SCG in the above message If not,

◆ 3> The UE may perform (or trigger or start) a random access procedure for SpCell (or SCG or PSCell).

◆ 3> If set (or instructed) to activate a cell group (eg, secondary cell group) in the above (or if the state of the cell group is not set to an inactive state in the above), the terminal initializes the MAC layer device (MAC reset). In the above, the MAC layer device initialization (MAC reset) procedure is performed after the terminal determines whether or not to perform the random access procedure, or after triggering the random access procedure, or when the random access procedure is successfully completed (or after completion), or the random access procedure It may also be performed when the cellgroup is activated without a random access procedure or when the cellgroup is successfully activated without a random access procedure (eg, PDCCH successful reception or transmission resource reception). This is because, when activating a cell group, if the MAC layer device is initialized first, the TAT (TimeAlignmentTimer) timer associated with the PTAG (or PSCell) is considered to have expired, and thus activating the cell group without the random access procedure proposed in the present disclosure. This is because the procedure cannot be performed (that is, the cell group can be activated without the random access procedure only when the TAT timer is running). Alternatively, a partial MAC reset of the MAC layer device may be performed instead of the MAC layer device initialization procedure. In the following of the present disclosure, the MAC layer device initialization procedure or the partial initialization procedure of the MAC layer device will be described in detail.

■ 2> otherwise (else)

◆ 3> End the procedure of the terminal.

-1> In the above message, if reconfigurationWithSync configuration information is included in spCellConfig of MCG or SCG, and if the MAC layer device of the NR cell group successfully completes the random access procedure triggered above,

■ 2> The first timer T304 for the cell group can be stopped (or if the timer is running).

■ 2> The second timer T310 for the cell group or source SpCell may be stopped (or if the timer is running).

- When reconfigurationWithSync is included in the message and the terminal performs a resetting procedure (reconfiguration with Sync) to match synchronization, the following procedure can be performed.

- 1> If a dual active protocol stack (DAPS) bearer is not established, or if the state of a cell group (or SCG) is not set to an inactive state, or RLM-related configuration or beam failure detection-related configuration information for an inactive cell group is not set (if the state of the cell group is set to the inactive state, the second timer is continuously driven and the RLM procedure is performed to support fast cell group activation), or the cell group in which this procedure is inactivated ( or SCG)

■ 2> The second timer T310 for the cell group or SpCell may be stopped (or if the timer is running).

- 1> The third timer T312 for the cell group or SpCell may be stopped (or if the timer is running).

- 1> unless the status of the cell group (or SCG) is set to inactive or if this procedure is not performed for a cell group (or SCG) that is inactive

■ 2> The first timer T304 for the SpCell (PCell of MCG or PSCell of SCG) can be started by setting the value of the first timer T304 included in the reconfigurationWithSync setting information of the message.

- As suggested in the present disclosure, if RLM-related configuration information or beam status detection-related configuration information is set for a cell group (or SCG) deactivated in an RRC message (eg, RRCReconfiguration message), the terminal radios as follows A radio link failure detection procedure may be performed.

■ 1> If the cell group state is set to the inactive state (or if the beam failure detection procedure or the RLM procedure is set for the inactive cell group), or for SpCell a predetermined number of times (eg, N310 value) If an indication that the synchronization is not correct is received from the lower layer device,

◆ A second timer (T310) for the SpCell may be started. (The second timer may be activated when the cell group state is activated (or set to active or not set to inactive) or for the SpCell. When the random access procedure is started or performed, or when the random access procedure is successfully completed) If the second timer is running, it can be stopped.) Also, if the second timer expires, for the cell group may declare that a radio connection failure has occurred)

■ 1> If a certain DAPS bearer is established, or if an indication that synchronization with the source SpCell is out of sync is received from the lower layer device a predetermined number of times (eg N310 value), or if the first timer is running,

◆ A second timer (T310) for the source SpCell can be started.

■ 1> If an indication that SpCell is not synchronized is received from the lower layer device a predetermined number of times (eg, N310 value), or if the first timer T304 or the fourth timer is not running,

◆ A second timer (T310) for the source SpCell can be started.

In the above, the terminal may receive the second RRC message (1k-20) or apply the received configuration information, generate a third RRC message (1k-25) or a fourth RRC message, and transmit it to the base station. (1k-25). The third RRC message may include some of the following information.

- A second RRC message identifier having the same value as the second RRC message identifier included in the second RRC message

-Indicator or identifier that the second RRC message was successfully received

- A fourth RRC message including a response indicating that the first RRC message generated and transmitted by the secondary base station was successfully received. The fourth RRC message may include some of the following information.

■ The first RRC message identifier having the same value as the first RRC message identifier included in the first RRC message

■ Indicator or identifier that the first RRC message was successfully received

■ Response indicator indicating successful application of the first RRC message

In the above, when the base station (eg, the master base station) receives the third RRC message, it can check whether it is a response message to the second RRC message through the second identifier. In addition, the fourth RRC message included in the third RRC message is checked, and the fourth RRC message is included in a setup completion message for instructing the secondary cell group base station that setup has been completed, so that the Xn interface (eg For example, it can be transmitted to the secondary base station through an interface between base stations) or an Sn interface (interface between base stations and AMF or UMF or base stations) (1k-30). The setting completion message may include some of the following information.

- The fourth RRC message included in the third RRC message

- An indicator or identifier that has completed the setting (cell group addition, change, or release) or instruction (cell group activation or deactivation, suspension or resumption) indicated in the request acceptance message or the first RRC message

In the above, when the base station (eg, secondary base station) receives the setting completion message, the fourth RRC message included in the setting completion message is read or checked, and whether it is a response message to the first RRC message is first It can be identified through the identifier of . In addition, it is possible to check whether the setting or instruction instructed by the base station is successfully completed. In the above, when the secondary base station receives the configuration completion message or the fourth RRC message, in response thereto, it may transmit a response message indicating that the configuration completion message or the fourth RRC message has been successfully received to the master base station.

FIG. 1L is a second method for establishing or releasing dual access technology, or setting or releasing, activating, resuming, stopping, or inactivating a secondary cell group configured with dual access technology in a next-generation mobile communication system to which the present disclosure may be applied. It is a diagram showing the signaling procedure of

In FIG. 1L, the terminal establishes an RRC connection with a network or a base station as in FIG. (PCell or SCell)) and data transmission or reception.

In the above, the base station may set the dual access technology to the terminal according to a predetermined reason (eg, when a high data rate is required or at the request of the terminal (1l-05) or when high QoS requirements must be satisfied). there is. For example, the terminal may send a request to the base station to set up or release or activate or deactivate or resume or stop the dual access technology or cell group (eg, secondary cell group) or cell, and in the request message, the frequency (or channel) measurement result report or cell group identifier or cell identifiers or measurement results (1l-05). In another method, the base station determines whether to establish, release, or add a dual access technology or cell group (eg, secondary cell group) or cell in consideration of the amount of downlink (or uplink) data or the amount of buffer. You can also decide whether to disable or disable or enable or resume or change or reset or pause.

In the above, the master base station (Master Node (MN) or Master Cell Group (MCG)) receives a frequency or channel measurement report for each frequency or channel received from the terminal, and sets up a dual access technology based on the measurement report. A base station (Secondary Node (SN) or Secondary Cell Group (SCG)) may be determined. Alternatively, the master base station determines whether the base station establishes or releases or adds or disables dual access technology or cell groups (eg secondary cell groups) or cells in consideration of the amount of downlink (or uplink) data or the amount of buffers. You can also decide whether to disable or activate or resume or change or reset or pause. In the above, the master base station establishes or releases or adds or deactivates or activates or resumes or changes or resets the dual access technology or cell group (eg secondary cell group) or cell for the determined secondary base station. Alternatively, a first RRC message may be transmitted to the terminal to stop (1l-10). In the first RRC message, the dual access technology or cell group (eg, secondary cell group) or cell is configured, or released, or added, or deactivated, or activated, or restarted, or changed, or reset, or In order to indicate stopping, each new request message may be defined and indicated. Alternatively, a new indicator may be defined in an existing message (eg, RRCReconfiguration message or RRCResume message) to indicate cell group (eg, RRCReconfiguration message or RRCResume message). For example, a secondary cell group) or a cell may be instructed (or requested) to set, release, add, deactivate, activate, resume, change, reset, or stop. The first RRC message may include some of the following information.

- A first RRC message identifier (eg rrc-Transaction identifier) for distinguishing the first RRC message. Since the terminal and the base station (eg, the master base station) transmit or receive multiple RRC messages to each other, an identifier for distinguishing each RRC message may be included in the RRC message. For example, an RRC message (eg, RRCReconfiguration) transmitted by a transmitter or an RRC message (eg, RRCReconfigurationComplete) corresponding to the RRC message (eg, RRCReconfiguration) transmitted by a receiver or the RRC transmitted by a transmitter The RRC message corresponding to the message may include the same first RRC message identifier.

- configuration information or indicators for establishing or releasing or adding or deactivating or activating or resuming or changing or resetting or stopping a dual access technology or cell group (e.g. secondary cell group) or cell; (eg, configuration information or indicator for a terminal)

- an indicator indicating the state of the cell group (e.g. active or inactive or suspended or resumed)

- A cell group identifier for distinguishing cell groups. The cell group identifier may be assigned by the master base station, or a secondary base station may assign one identifier among previously agreed identifiers.)

- Cell group or cell setting information

- Bearer setup information. For example, indicator information (eg, PDCP stop indicator or PDCP re-establishment indicator) indicating the operation of a protocol layer device (eg, SDAP layer device, PDCP layer device, RLC layer device, or MAC layer device) of each bearer. indicator or PDCP data recovery indicator or RLC re-establishment indicator or MAC part initialization indicator or MAC initialization indicator or indicator triggering a new operation)

- In the above case, if the dual access technology or cell group (eg, secondary cell group) or cell is set, added, activated, restarted, changed, or reset, if the setting information or indicator is included, the first An indicator (eg, mobilityControlInfor or ReconfigurationWithSync) may also be included. However, in the case of including setting information or indicators for releasing, inactivating, resetting, or stopping the dual access technology or cell group (eg, secondary cell group) or cell in the above, the first indicator (eg, secondary cell group) For example, mobilityControlInfor or ReconfigurationWithSync) may not be included. In the above, the first indicator may be an indicator for triggering a random access procedure to the cell group or cell, or an indicator for synchronizing a signal with a new cell, or an indicator for instructing a frequency movement of a terminal. , or may be an indicator indicating a change in cell group (or cell). Alternatively, the UE may perform PDCCH monitoring in the cell group or cell indicated or configured above, and trigger and perform a random access procedure as indicated by the PDCCH. For example, an upper layer device (eg, RRC layer device) may send an indicator for triggering a random access procedure to a lower layer device (eg, MAC layer device).

- Random access in the case of including setting information or indicators for setting, adding, activating, resuming, changing, or resetting a dual access technology or cell group (eg, secondary cell group) or cell. You can also include configuration information. However, in the case of including setting information or indicators for releasing, inactivating, resetting, or stopping the dual access technology or cell group (eg, secondary cell group) or cell, the random access setting information is not included. may not be The random access configuration information may include random access transmission resource information (time or frequency transmission resource) or designated preamble information for preamble transmission for the cell group or cell.

- time information (eg, secondary cell group) or cell (PSCell or SCG SCell) indicating when to activate or resume or deactivate or suspend the dual access technology or cell group (eg secondary cell group) or cell (PSCell or SCG SCell); Information indicating timing (eg, X), time unit, subframe or time slot, or symbol unit, for example, whether to activate a cell at n+X th if the message is received at n th time unit or time information indicating whether to resume or disable or stop)

- First channel measurement setting information for each cell or partial bandwidth

-Secondary channel measurement setting information for each cell or partial bandwidth

- An indicator for adding cell group settings, an indicator for changing a cell group (ReconfigurationWithSync), or an indicator for random access procedures (ReconfigurationWithSync or a newly defined indicator)

- An indicator instructing whether to activate the cell group by performing a random access procedure when activating a cell group or activating a cell group without a random access procedure (ReconfigurationWithSync or a newly defined indicator)

-RRM (radio resource management) setting information or frequency measurement setting information or separate RRM (Radio Resource Management) setting information or frequency measurement setting information (for example, battery saving Simplified frequency measurement setting information (Reduced or Relaxed RRM setting information)

- Configuration information for radio link monitoring (RLM) or configuration information for RLM to be applied or performed when a cell group is deactivated. For example, when a cell group is deactivated, configuration information of beams in units of cells to be measured by the terminal or configuration information of beams for each partial bandwidth, and beam-related configuration information (transmission configuration indication (TCI) state or quasi co-location (QCL)) May include or a timing advance (TA) value (or offset value) for synchronizing the downlink signal of the base station or the uplink signal of the base station or a timer indicating the validity of the TA value (TAT, time alignment timer) Alternatively, it may include a timer value (TAT value), or synchronization signal block (SSB) setting information or channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS) setting information or reference signal (RS) setting information or beams to be measured. When a failure occurs, transmission resource information (eg, PUCCH configuration information (eg, SR (scheduling request) information or specific transmission resources) or frequency transmission resources or time transmission resources) capable of reporting a result may be included. can In addition, the setting information may include partial bandwidth setting information (eg, indicated by a partial bandwidth identifier) indicating in which partial bandwidth the RLM procedure is to be performed. Alternatively, when the cell group state is inactive, the terminal performs the RLM procedure in the first active partial bandwidth (or first active downlink partial bandwidth, firstActiveDownlinkBWP-ID) set in the RRC message to activate the cell group When performing this process, the initial activation partial bandwidth to be activated can be monitored early to minimize the cell group activation delay. As another method, when the cell group state is set to the inactive state (or active state), the terminal performs the RLM procedure in the last (or previously) activated partial bandwidth before the cell group state becomes inactive, It is also possible to maintain the connection with the cell group continuously (for example, when the partial bandwidth setting information indicating in which partial bandwidth to perform the RLM procedure is not set), or when activating the cell group, in the RRC message The activation procedure may be performed in the set first active partial bandwidth (or first active downlink partial bandwidth, firstActiveDownlinkBWP-ID). If the partial bandwidth-related setting information indicating in which partial bandwidth to perform the RLM procedure is not set when activating the cell group, the RLM procedure may be performed in the last (or previously) activated partial bandwidth. there is. In addition, the setting information may include beam-related setting information (for example, a partial bandwidth identifier, TCI state, or QCL setting information) indicating which beam to perform the RLM procedure on. Alternatively, when the cell group state is inactive, the terminal performs the RLM procedure on the beam (eg, TCI state or QCL configuration information) set in the RRC message or activates the beam and performs the RLM procedure , when activating a cell group, a beam to be activated may be monitored early to minimize cell group activation delay. As another method, when the cell group state is set to the inactive state (or active state), the terminal performs the RLM procedure on the last (or previously) activated beam before the cell group state becomes inactive, so that the cell group (For example, when beam-related setting information indicating which beam to perform the RLM procedure is not set), or when activating a cell group, set in the RRC message You can have the beam perform an activation procedure. If beam-related configuration information indicating which beam to perform the RLM procedure is not set when activating the cell group, the RLM procedure may be performed on the last (or previously) activated beam.

- Configuration information for a beam failure detection procedure or beam failure detection (BFD) or configuration information for BFD to be applied or performed when a cell group is deactivated. For example, when a cell group is inactivated, configuration information of beams in units of cells to be measured by the UE or configuration information of beams for each partial bandwidth, and beam-related configuration information (transmission configuration indication (TCI) state or quasi co-location (QCL) information) )) or a timing advance (TA) value (or offset value) for synchronizing the downlink signal of the base station or the uplink signal of the base station or a timer (TAT, time alignment) indicating the validity of the TA value timer) or timer value (TAT value), or SSB (synchronization signal block) setting information, CSI-RS (channel state information reference signal) setting information, or RS (reference signal) setting information that is a target to be measured. Or, if beam failure occurs, transmission resource information (eg, PUCCH configuration information (eg, SR (scheduling request) information or specific transmission resources) or frequency transmission resources or time transmission resources) capable of reporting the result can include In addition, the setting information may include partial bandwidth setting information indicating in which partial bandwidth the beam failure detection procedure is to be performed (for example, it may be indicated by a partial bandwidth identifier). As another method, when the cell group state is inactive, the UE performs a beam failure detection procedure in the first active partial bandwidth (or first active downlink partial bandwidth, firstActiveDownlinkBWP-ID) set in the RRC message, so that the cell group When activating the cell group activation delay, it is possible to minimize the cell group activation delay by early monitoring the initial activation partial bandwidth to be activated. As another method, when the cell group state is set to the inactive state (or active state), the terminal performs a beam failure detection procedure in the last (or previously) activated partial bandwidth before the cell group state becomes inactive. (For example, when partial bandwidth setting information indicating in which partial bandwidth the beam failure detection procedure is to be performed is not set) or to activate the cell group When doing so, the activation procedure may be performed in the first active partial bandwidth (or first active downlink partial bandwidth, firstActiveDownlinkBWP-ID) set in the RRC message. If the partial bandwidth-related setting information indicating in which partial bandwidth the beam failure detection procedure is to be performed is not set when the cell group is activated, the beam failure detection procedure is performed in the last (or previously) activated partial bandwidth. you might as well make it work. In addition, the setting information includes beam-related setting information (eg, a partial bandwidth identifier, TCI state, or QCL setting information) indicating which beam to perform the beam failure detection procedure on. can As another method, when the cell group state is inactive, the UE performs a beam failure detection procedure on the beam (eg, TCI state or QCL configuration information) set in the RRC message, so that when activating the cell group, The cell group activation delay can be minimized by early monitoring of the beam to be performed. As another method, when the cell group state is set to the inactive state (or active state), the terminal performs a beam failure detection procedure on the last (or previously) activated beam before the cell group state becomes inactive, It is also possible to keep the connection with the cell group continuously (for example, when beam-related configuration information indicating which beam to perform the beam failure detection procedure is not set) or when activating the cell group, RRC The activation procedure can be performed on the beam set in the message. If beam-related configuration information indicating which beam to perform the beam failure detection procedure is not set when activating a cell group, the beam failure detection procedure is performed on the last (or previously) activated beam. may be

In the above, when the terminal receives the first RRC message (1l-15), the first RRC message is read and checked, and the terminal sets a dual access technology or cell group (eg, secondary cell group), or or add or change or resume or stop or deactivate. In addition, if the first indicator for triggering the random access procedure is included in the first RRC message, the random access procedure may be triggered for the cell group or cell set or indicated above. When performing the random access procedure in the above, if there is random access information in the RRC message or if there is stored random access information, random access based on the random access information stored or received in the RRC message or system information A procedure (eg, non-contention based random access procedure (eg, 4-step random access or 2-step random access) may be performed. If there is no random access information in the RRC message, the random access procedure (eg, , may perform a contention-based random access procedure (eg, 4-step random access or 2-step random access) Alternatively, the UE performs PDCCH monitoring in the cell group or cell indicated or configured above and may trigger and perform a random access procedure as directed by the PDCCH For example, a higher layer device (eg, RRC layer device) may transmit a random access procedure to a lower layer device (eg, MAC layer device). You can send an indicator that triggers an access procedure.

In the above, the terminal may receive the first RRC message (1l-10) or apply the received configuration information, generate a second RRC message, and transmit it to the base station (1l-15). The second RRC message may include some of the following information.

- A first RRC message identifier having the same value as the first RRC message identifier included in the first RRC message

-Indicator or identifier that the first RRC message was successfully received

In the above, when the base station (eg, the master base station) receives the second RRC message, it can check whether it is a response message to the first RRC message through the first identifier. In addition, after confirming the first RRC message, the base station transmits an instruction message including an instruction of setting, adding, canceling, activating, resuming, stopping, or inactivating a cell group to the secondary cell group base station through an Xn interface (e.g., a base station interface) or Sn interface (interface between base station and AMF or UMF or base station) to the secondary base station (1l-20). The indication message may include some of the following information.

- an identifier that allows the indication message to be distinguished

- configuration information or indicators for establishing or releasing or adding or deactivating or activating or resuming or changing or resetting or stopping a dual access technology or cell group (e.g. secondary cell group) or cell; (eg, setting information or indicator for secondary cell group)

In the above, when the base station (eg, secondary base station) receives the indication message, it reads or checks the setting information or message included in the indication message, generates an indication confirmation message as a response message to the indication message, and sends the message to the master base station. Can transmit (1l-25).

- Identifier having the same value as the identifier included in the indication message

- An indicator or identifier indicating that the indication message has been successfully received

- Response indicator indicating successful application of the indication message

The signaling procedures proposed in the present disclosure can be fused and modified to be extended to new signaling procedures. For example, when the master base station receives the 1l-05 message from the terminal, the master base station inquires or requests 1l-20 or 1k-10 of FIG. 1k to the secondary base station, and then sends 1l-25 or After receiving a response message such as 1k-15 of 1k, an RRC message corresponding to 1l-10 is configured according to the response message and transmitted to the terminal, and the terminal sets a cell group according to the instruction of the RRC message and In response, a 1l-15 message may be transmitted to the master base station.

FIG. 1M is a third step for setting or releasing a dual access technology, or setting or releasing, activating, resuming, stopping, or inactivating a secondary cell group configured with the dual access technology in a next-generation mobile communication system to which the present disclosure may be applied. It is a diagram showing the signaling procedure of

In FIG. 1m, the UE establishes an RRC connection with a network or a base station as in FIG. (PCell or SCell)) and data transmission or reception.

In FIG. 1M, according to the setting procedure of FIG. 1F, the base station may set an SRB (for example, SRB3) capable of directly transmitting or receiving a control message or an RRC message between the terminal and the secondary base station to the terminal.

In the above, a base station (eg, a secondary base station or a master base station) is configured for a predetermined reason (eg, when a high data rate is required or by a request of a terminal (1m-05) or when a high QoS requirement must be satisfied). case, etc.), dual access technology can be set for the terminal. For example, the terminal may send a request to the base station to configure or release or activate or deactivate or resume or stop the dual access technology or cell group (eg, secondary cell group) or cell, or the secondary base station through the SRB3. A request may be sent to , and the request message may include a frequency (or channel) measurement result report or a cell group identifier or cell identifiers or measurement results (1m-05). In another method, the secondary base station considers the amount of downlink (or uplink) data or the amount of buffers to determine whether or not the base station establishes or releases a dual access technology or a cell group (eg, secondary cell group) or cell. You can also decide whether to disable or disable or enable or resume or change or reset or pause.

In the above, the secondary base station (Master Node (MN) or Master Cell Group (MCG)) receives a frequency or channel measurement report for each frequency or channel received from the terminal, and based on the measurement report, a dual access technology or cell group ( For example, a secondary cell group) or cell may be set, released, added, deactivated, activated, resumed, changed, reset, or stopped. Or whether the base station establishes or releases or adds a dual access technology or cell group (eg, secondary cell group) or cell in consideration of the amount of downlink (or uplink) data or the amount of buffer. You can also decide to disable or enable or resume or change or reset or stop.

In the above, the secondary base station is used to establish or release or add or deactivate or activate or resume or change or reset or stop a dual access technology or cell group (eg, secondary cell group) or cell. A first RRC message may be transmitted to the UE through SRB3 (1m-10). In the first RRC message, the dual access technology or cell group (eg, secondary cell group) or cell is set, released, added, deactivated, activated, restarted, changed, reset, or Alternatively, each separate new request message may be defined and indicated to indicate stopping. Alternatively, a new indicator may be defined in an existing message (eg, RRCReconfiguration message or RRCResume message, etc.) to the cell group ( For example, a secondary cell group) or cell may be instructed (or requested) to set, release, add, deactivate, activate, resume, change, reset, or stop. The first RRC message may include some of the following information.

- A first RRC message identifier (eg, rrc-Transaction identifier) for distinguishing the first RRC message. Since the terminal and the base station (eg, the secondary base station) transmit or receive multiple RRC messages to each other, an identifier for distinguishing each RRC message may be included in the RRC message. For example, an RRC message (eg, RRCReconfiguration) transmitted by a transmitter or an RRC message (eg, RRCReconfigurationComplete) corresponding to the RRC message (eg, RRCReconfiguration) transmitted by a receiver or the The RRC message corresponding to the RRC message may include the same first RRC message identifier.

- configuration information or indicators for establishing or releasing or adding or deactivating or activating or resuming or changing or resetting or stopping a dual access technology or cell group (e.g. secondary cell group) or cell; (eg, configuration information or indicator for a terminal)

- an indicator indicating the state of the cell group (e.g. active or inactive or suspended or resumed)

- A cell group identifier for distinguishing cell groups. The cell group identifier may be assigned by the master base station, or a secondary base station may assign one identifier among previously agreed identifiers.)

- Cell group or cell setting information

- Bearer setup information. For example, indicator information (eg, PDCP stop indicator or PDCP re-establishment indicator) indicating the operation of a protocol layer device (eg, SDAP layer device, PDCP layer device, RLC layer device, or MAC layer device) of each bearer. indicator or PDCP data recovery indicator or RLC re-establishment indicator or MAC part initialization indicator or MAC initialization indicator or indicator triggering a new operation)

- In the above case, if the dual access technology or cell group (eg, secondary cell group) or cell is set, added, activated, restarted, changed, or reset, if the setting information or indicator is included, the first An indicator (eg, mobilityControlInfor or ReconfigurationWithSync) may also be included. However, in the case of including setting information or indicators for releasing, inactivating, resetting, or stopping the dual access technology or cell group (eg, secondary cell group) or cell in the above, the first indicator (eg, secondary cell group) , mobilityControlInfor or ReconfigurationWithSync). In the above, the first indicator may be an indicator for triggering a random access procedure to the cell group or cell. Alternatively, it may be an indicator for synchronizing a signal with a new cell. Alternatively, it may be an indicator indicating frequency movement of the terminal. Alternatively, it may be an indicator indicating a change of a cell group (or cell). in another way. The UE may perform PDCCH monitoring in the cell group or cell indicated or configured above, and may trigger and perform a random access procedure as indicated by the PDCCH. For example. An upper layer device (eg, RRC layer device) may send an indicator for triggering a random access procedure to a lower layer device (eg, MAC layer device).

- Random access in the case of including setting information or indicators for setting, adding, activating, resuming, changing, or resetting a dual access technology or cell group (eg, secondary cell group) or cell in the above You can also include configuration information. However, the random access setting information may not be included in the case of including configuration information or indicators for releasing, inactivating, resetting, or stopping the dual access technology or cell group (eg, secondary cell group) or cell in the above description. can The random access configuration information may include random access transmission resource information (time or frequency transmission resource) or designated preamble information for preamble transmission for the cell group or cell.

- Time information indicating when to activate or resume or deactivate or suspend a dual access technology or cell group (eg. Information indicating timing (eg, X), time unit, subframe or time slot or symbol unit), for example. If the message is received in the nth time unit, time information indicating whether to activate, resume, deactivate, or stop the cell in the n+Xth time unit)

- First channel measurement setting information for each cell or partial bandwidth

-Secondary channel measurement setting information for each cell or partial bandwidth

- An indicator for adding cell group settings or an indicator for changing cell groups (ReconfigurationWithSync) or an indicator for random access procedures (ReconfigurationWithSync or a newly defined indicator)

- An indicator instructing whether to activate the cell group by performing a random access procedure when activating a cell group or activating a cell group without a random access procedure (ReconfigurationWithSync or a newly defined indicator)

- RRM (radio resource management) setting information or frequency measurement setting information or separate RRM (radio resource management) setting information or frequency measurement setting information to be applied or performed when a cell group is deactivated (eg, battery saving Simplified frequency measurement setting information (Reduced or Relaxed RRM setting information)

- Configuration information for radio link monitoring (RLM) or configuration information for RLM to be applied or performed when a cell group is deactivated. For example, when a cell group is deactivated, configuration information of beams in units of cells to be measured by the terminal or configuration information of beams for each partial bandwidth, and beam-related configuration information (transmission configuration indication (TCI) state or quasi co-location (QCL)) May include or a timing advance (TA) value (or offset value) for synchronizing the downlink signal of the base station or the uplink signal of the base station or a timer indicating the validity of the TA value (TAT, time alignment timer) Alternatively, it may include a timer value (TAT value), or synchronization signal block (SSB) setting information, channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS) setting information, or reference signal (RS) setting information or beam to be measured. When a failure occurs, transmission resource information (eg, PUCCH configuration information (eg, SR (scheduling request) information or specific transmission resources) or frequency transmission resources or time transmission resources) capable of reporting a result may be included. can In addition, the setting information may include partial bandwidth setting information (eg, indicated by a partial bandwidth identifier) indicating in which partial bandwidth the RLM procedure is to be performed. Alternatively, when the cell group state is inactive, the UE activates the cell group by performing the RLM procedure in the first active partial bandwidth (or first active downlink partial bandwidth, firstActiveDownlinkBWP-ID) set in the RRC message. The first activation partial bandwidth to be activated at the time of activation may be monitored early to minimize the cell group activation delay. As another method, when the cell group state is set to the inactive state (or active state), the terminal performs the RLM procedure in the last (or previously) activated partial bandwidth before the cell group state becomes inactive, It is also possible to keep the connection with the cell group continuously (for example, when partial bandwidth setting information indicating which partial bandwidth to perform the RLM procedure is not set) or when activating the cell group, RRC message The activation procedure may be performed in the first active partial bandwidth (or first active downlink partial bandwidth, firstActiveDownlinkBWP-ID) set in If the partial bandwidth-related setting information indicating in which partial bandwidth to perform the RLM procedure is not set when activating the cell group, the RLM procedure may be performed in the last (or previously) activated partial bandwidth. there is. In addition, the setting information may include beam-related setting information (eg, a partial bandwidth identifier, TCI state, or QCL setting information) indicating which beam to perform the RLM procedure on. . Alternatively, when the cell group state is inactive, the UE performs the RLM procedure on the beam (eg, TCI state or QCL configuration information) set in the RRC message or activates the beam and performs the RLM procedure In addition, when activating a cell group, a beam to be activated may be monitored early to minimize cell group activation delay. As another method, when the cell group state is set to the inactive state (or active state), the terminal performs the RLM procedure on the last (or previously) activated beam before the cell group state becomes inactive, so that the cell group (For example, when beam-related setting information indicating which beam to perform the RLM procedure is not set) or when activating a cell group, the beam set in the RRC message can be used to perform the activation procedure. If beam-related setting information indicating which beam to perform the RLM procedure is not set when activating the cell group, the RLM procedure may be performed on the last (or previously) activated beam.

- Configuration information for a beam failure detection procedure or beam failure detection (BFD) or configuration information for BFD to be applied or performed when a cell group is deactivated. For example, when a cell group is deactivated, configuration information of beams in units of cells to be measured by the terminal or configuration information of beams for each partial bandwidth, and beam-related configuration information (transmission configuration indication (TCI) state or quasi co-location (QCL)) May include or a timing advance (TA) value (or offset value) for synchronizing the downlink signal of the base station or the uplink signal of the base station or a timer indicating the validity of the TA value (TAT, time alignment timer) Alternatively, it may include a timer value (TAT value), or SSB (synchronization signal block) setting information or CSI-RS (channel state information reference signal) setting information or RS (reference signal) setting information or beam to be measured. When a failure occurs, transmission resource information (eg, PUCCH configuration information (eg, SR (scheduling request) information or specific transmission resources) or frequency transmission resources or time transmission resources) capable of reporting a result may be included. can In addition, the setting information may include partial bandwidth setting information (for example, indicated by a partial bandwidth identifier) indicating in which partial bandwidth the beam failure detection procedure is to be performed. As another method, when the cell group state is inactive, the UE performs a beam failure detection procedure in the first active partial bandwidth (or first active downlink partial bandwidth, firstActiveDownlinkBWP-ID) set in the RRC message, so that the cell group At the time of activation, the initial activation partial bandwidth to be activated may be monitored early to minimize the cell group activation delay. As another method, when the cell group state is set to the inactive state (or active state), the terminal performs a beam failure detection procedure in the last (or previously) activated partial bandwidth before the cell group state becomes inactive. (For example, when partial bandwidth setting information indicating in which partial bandwidth the beam failure detection procedure is to be performed is not set) or to activate the cell group When doing so, the activation procedure may be performed in the first active partial bandwidth (or first active downlink partial bandwidth, firstActiveDownlinkBWP-ID) set in the RRC message. If the partial bandwidth-related setting information indicating in which partial bandwidth the beam failure detection procedure is to be performed is not set when the cell group is activated, the beam failure detection procedure is performed in the last (or previously) activated partial bandwidth. you might as well make it work. In addition, the setting information includes beam-related setting information (eg, a partial bandwidth identifier, TCI state, or QCL setting information) indicating which beam to perform the beam failure detection procedure on. can As another method, when the cell group state is inactive, the UE performs a beam failure detection procedure on the beam (eg, TCI state or QCL configuration information) set in the RRC message, so that when activating the cell group, The cell group activation delay can be minimized by early monitoring of the beam to be performed. As another method, when the cell group state is set to the inactive state (or active state), the terminal performs a beam failure detection procedure on the last (or previously) activated beam before the cell group state becomes inactive, It is also possible to keep the connection with the cell group continuously (for example, when beam-related configuration information indicating which beam to perform the beam failure detection procedure is not set) or when activating the cell group, RRC The activation procedure can be performed on the beam set in the message. If beam-related configuration information indicating which beam to perform the beam failure detection procedure is not set when activating a cell group, the beam failure detection procedure is performed on the last (or previously) activated beam. may be

In the above, when the terminal receives the first RRC message (1m-15) through SRB3, the first RRC message is read and checked, and the terminal uses dual access technology or a cell group (eg, secondary cell group) You can set or add or change or resume or stop or disable. In addition, if the first indicator for triggering the random access procedure is included in the first RRC message, the random access procedure may be triggered for the cell group or cell set or indicated above. When performing the random access procedure above, if there is random access information in the RRC message or if there is stored random access information, based on the random access information stored or received in the RRC message or system information, An access procedure (eg, non-contention-based random access procedure (eg, 4-step random access or 2-step random access) may be performed. If there is no random access information in the RRC message, the random access procedure (eg, 4-step random access or 2-step random access) For example, a contention-based random access procedure (eg, 4-step random access or 2-step random access) may be performed Alternatively, the UE monitors the PDCCH in the cell group or cell indicated or configured above. and may trigger and perform a random access procedure as instructed by the PDCCH For example, a higher layer device (eg, RRC layer device) may transmit a lower layer device (eg, MAC layer device) An indicator triggering a random access procedure may be sent.

In the above, the terminal may receive the first RRC message (1m-10) or apply the received configuration information, generate a second RRC message, and transmit it to the secondary base station through SRB3 (1m-15). The second RRC message may include some of the following information.

- A first RRC message identifier having the same value as the first RRC message identifier included in the first RRC message

-Indicator or identifier that the first RRC message was successfully received

In the above, when the base station (eg, secondary base station) receives the second RRC message, it can check whether it is a response message to the first RRC message through the first identifier. And, after confirming the first RRC message, the base station transmits an instruction message including an instruction of setting, adding, releasing, activating, resuming, stopping, or inactivating a cell group to the master base station or the master cell group base station through the Xn interface (eg For example, it can be transmitted to the master base station through an interface between base stations) or an Sn interface (interface between base stations and AMF or UMF or base stations) (1m-20). The indication message may include some of the following information.

- an identifier that allows the indication message to be distinguished

- configuration information or indicators for establishing or releasing or adding or deactivating or activating or resuming or changing or resetting or stopping a dual access technology or cell group (e.g. secondary cell group) or cell; (eg, setting information or indicator for secondary cell group)

In the above, when the base station (eg, master base station) receives the indication message, it reads or confirms the setting information or message included in the indication message, generates an indication confirmation message as a response message to the indication message, and transmits it to the secondary base station. can (1m-25).

- Identifier having the same value as the identifier included in the indication message

- An indicator or identifier indicating that the indication message has been successfully received

- Response indicator indicating successful application of the indication message

When a message is sent to the terminal to set or indicate the cell group or cell configuration information proposed in the present disclosure to the terminal, for example, if the dual access technology or cell group (eg, secondary cell group) in the above Or, if the message includes configuration information or indicators for setting, adding, activating, resuming, changing, or resetting a cell, SDAP configuration information is included or reset, or bearers and QoS flow of SDAP layer devices are included. of mapping setting information, or can be set or reset. However, in the case of including setting information or indicators for releasing, inactivating, resetting, or stopping the dual access technology or cell group (eg, secondary cell group) or cell, the SDAP setting information is not included or reset Otherwise, mapping configuration information of the bearer and QoS flow of the SDAP layer device may not be included, not configured, not reset, or application may be stopped.

The signaling procedures proposed in the present disclosure can be fused and modified to be extended to new signaling procedures.

The signaling procedures proposed in the present disclosure can be extended to multiple access technologies. For example, configuration information of a plurality of cell groups can be configured as an RRC message to the terminal, and one or a plurality of cell groups (or cells) among the configured plurality of cell groups can be transmitted as an indicator of PDCCH, MAC control information, or RRC message. It can be activated or resumed, or one or more cell groups can be suspended or deactivated.

Hereinafter, when activating, restarting, adding, inactivating, releasing, or stopping the dual access technology or cell group (eg, secondary cell group) or cell (PSCell or SCG SCell) proposed in the present disclosure, each cell (PSCell or SCG SCell) or UE operation for each protocol layer device (eg, SDAP layer device or PDCP layer device or RLC layer device or MAC layer device or PHY layer device) is proposed.

- 1> If dual access technology or cell group (eg, secondary cell group) or cell is configured or added or activated or restarted or changed or reset, configuration information or indicator (eg, PDCCH If the terminal receives the DCI of or MAC control information or RRC message), the terminal may perform some of the following procedures.

■ 2> An upper layer device (eg, RRC layer device) may instruct a lower layer device (eg, PDCP layer device, RLC layer device, MAC layer device, or PHY layer device) with the configuration information or indicator.

■ 2> Operation of the UE for the PSCell: When the UE receives the configuration information or indicator from above, the UE maintains the PSCell in an active state and uses the downlink partial bandwidth of the PSCell as the normal partial bandwidth set in the RRC message (eg, the first active portion bandwidth or a partial bandwidth that is not a dormant partial bandwidth) or the last activated partial bandwidth, and can perform terminal operations in the activated partial bandwidth. As another method, when the UE receives the configuration information or indicator from above, the UE maintains the PSCell in an active state, resets or switches the PDCCH monitoring cycle or DRX configuration cycle of the PSCell to a short cycle based on the first DRX configuration information, and Monitoring may be performed and the terminal operation of the active cell may be performed. In the above method, it is possible to quickly receive a scheduling indication from a cell group or cell and start data transmission or reception by performing a terminal operation for the PSCell. In addition, in the above, the terminal measures many or frequent channel signals based on the first channel measurement configuration information set in the RRC message to quickly receive a scheduling indication from a cell group or cell and start data transmission or reception. Channel measurement The report may report the measurement result to the base station. If the predetermined condition is satisfied, the terminal may again measure a channel signal based on the second channel measurement configuration information and report the measurement result to the base station.

■ 2> UE operation for the SCell of the secondary cell group: When the UE receives the configuration information or indicator above, the UE activates the SCell of the secondary cell group, and sets the downlink partial bandwidth or uplink partial bandwidth to the partial bandwidth set in the RRC message ( For example, it is activated with the first activation partial bandwidth), and the activated SCell or the terminal operation of the partial bandwidth can be performed. As another method, when the UE receives the configuration information or indicator from the above, if a dormant partial bandwidth is set in the SCell of the secondary cell group, the SCell maintains an active state and transmits the downlink partial bandwidth of the SCell in the RRC message. It can be activated with a set partial bandwidth (for example, an initially activated partial bandwidth) and can perform a terminal operation in the activated partial bandwidth, or if a dormant partial bandwidth is not set for the SCell of the secondary cell group, the SCell After switching to the active state, the downlink partial bandwidth or uplink partial bandwidth is activated to the partial bandwidth set in the RRC message (eg, the initially activated partial bandwidth), and the activated SCell or partial bandwidth terminal operation can be performed. As another method, when the terminal receives the setting information or indicator from above, the terminal determines the state of the SCell or switching or activating or deactivating the partial bandwidth according to the SCell setting information or indicator set in the message including the setting information or indicator, and the terminal action can be performed.

■ 2> Terminal operation of the MAC layer device for the secondary cell group: The terminal receives the setting information or indicator from the above Upon reception, an initialization procedure (MAC reset) may be performed on the MAC layer device (eg, setting information set in the MAC layer device may be initialized or released, set timers may be stopped or initialized, or HARQ procedures can also be stopped or initiated). For example, it may be considered that a timing advance timer (TAT) timer indicating the validity of signal synchronization between the terminal and the base station is stopped or expired. As another method, the terminal may perform the MAC partial initialization procedure upon receiving the configuration information or indicator from above (or, if an indicator indicating the MAC partial initialization procedure is included in the message including the configuration information or indicator, the MAC You may also perform a partial initialization procedure). For example, a timing advance timer (TAT) timer indicating the validity of signal synchronization between the terminal and the base station may be continuously maintained, or HARQ retransmission may be continuously performed during retransmission. Alternatively, the current configuration may be maintained without performing any procedure on the MAC layer device. In addition, if an instruction to trigger a random access procedure is indicated from a higher layer device (eg, an RRC layer device) in the above, or if the TAT timer is stopped or expired, the terminal can trigger the random access procedure. Alternatively, if the TAT timer has not stopped or has not expired, the random access procedure may not be triggered or performed. This is because if the TAT timer is running, an unnecessary random access procedure is performed because the synchronization of the signal with the secondary cell group is matched or maintained. As another method, when the base station triggers the random access procedure with the indication of the PDCCH, the terminal may trigger the random access procedure, set or adjust a TA (Timing Advance) value, or start a TA timer. After completing the random access procedure, the secondary cell group may be resumed or activated and data transmission or reception may be resumed. In the above, the random access procedure may perform a contention based random access (CBRA) procedure. As another method, when the random access procedure is performed, the random access configuration information (dedicated RACH config or dedicated preamble) specified in the message indicating activation or resumption of the cell group (or previously received message) is set (or included), a contention free random access (CFRA) procedure may be performed, or random access configuration information (dedicated RACH config or If the dedicated preamble is not configured (or included), a contention based random access (CBRA) procedure may be performed or the random access procedure may not be performed. If the cell group (eg, secondary cell group) is configured (or instructed) to be activated in the above (or if the state of the cell group is not set to an inactive state in the above), the UE initializes the MAC layer device (MAC reset )can do. In the above, the MAC layer device initialization (MAC reset) procedure is performed after the terminal determines whether or not to perform the random access procedure, or after triggering the random access procedure, or when the random access procedure is successfully completed (or after completion), or the random access procedure It may also be performed when the cellgroup is activated without a random access procedure or when the cellgroup is successfully activated without a random access procedure (eg, PDCCH successful reception or transmission resource reception). This is because, when activating a cell group, if the MAC layer device is initialized first, the TAT (TimeAlignmentTimer) timer associated with the PTAG (or PSCell) is considered to have expired, and thus activating the cell group without the random access procedure proposed in the present disclosure. This is because the procedure cannot be performed (that is, the cell group can be activated without the random access procedure only when the TAT timer is running). Alternatively, a partial MAC reset of the MAC layer device may be performed instead of the MAC layer device initialization procedure. As suggested above, if the MAC layer device is not initialized or partially initialized, the data stored in the downlink buffer of the terminal is not flushed, so data can be stored later (for example, after cell group activation). An error may occur in soft combining when receiving, or the data in the uplink buffer (e.g., message3 buffer or messageA buffer) may not be cleared later (e.g., when cell group is activated or later). E) When sending data, old data may be transmitted and an error may occur.

■ 2> Operation for the data radio bearer (DRB) configured in the secondary cell group: The terminal transmits the configuration information or indicator in the above Upon reception, DRBs included in the secondary cell group (or SN(SCG) terminated DRBs or DRBs in which PDCP layer devices are configured in SCGs or bearers using RLC UM mode or bearers using RLC AM mode) can be resumed. For example, for a split bearer in which a PDCP layer device is configured in the master cell group (one RLC layer device is configured in the master cell group and another RLC layer device is configured in the secondary cell group), including the configuration information or indicator The RRC message may also include an indicator (reestablishRLC) for triggering a re-establishment procedure for the RLC layer device configured in the secondary cell group, or the UE may perform a re-establishment procedure for the RLC layer device configured in the secondary cell group. For example, for a split bearer in which a PDCP layer device is configured in a secondary cell group (one RLC layer device is configured in a master cell group and another RLC layer device is configured in a secondary cell group), including the configuration information or indicator In the RRC message, an indicator (reestablishRLC) triggering a re-establishment procedure for an RLC layer device configured in the master cell group may be included, or a PDCP re-establishment procedure (reestablishPDCP) or a PDCP resume procedure (reestablishPDCP) in a PDCP layer device configured in the secondary cell group ( PDCP resume) may be included together, or the UE performs a re-establishment procedure for an RLC layer device configured in the master cell group, or a PDCP re-establishment procedure or PDCP resume in a PDCP layer device configured in the secondary cell group You can perform the procedure (PDCP resume). For example, bearers may be resumed for a bearer configured in a secondary cell group, or an RRC layer device may instruct a PDCP layer device to trigger a PDCP re-establishment procedure or a PDCP resume procedure, or a PDCP layer device may instruct a PDCP layer device to trigger a PDCP re-establishment procedure or a PDCP resume procedure. A re-establishment procedure or a PDCP resume procedure may be performed. In the above, the UE triggers the first PDCP resumption procedure for bearers configured in the secondary cell group (or bearers using the RLC UM mode or bearers using the RLC AM mode), or the first PDCP in the PDCP layer device A resumption procedure may be performed. As another method, in order to solve the security issue caused by transmitting different data with the same security key when the terminal activates or resumes the secondary cell group, bearers configured in the secondary cell group (or using the RLC UM mode) bearer or a bearer using the RLC AM mode), or the PDCP layer device may perform the second PDCP resume procedure. Alternatively, when the upper layer device triggers the PDCP layer device resume procedure, the first PDCP resume procedure may be triggered and performed, the upper layer device triggers the PDCP layer device resume procedure, or the cell group ( Alternatively, when an indicator for activating or resuming a cell) is indicated, the second PDCP resumption procedure may be triggered and performed. Alternatively, in order to solve the security issue caused by transmitting different data with the same security key, the cell group (or cell) In the RRC message including an indicator for activating or resuming, a new security key may be set including security key setting information (eg, sk-counter), and the security key may be changed or updated, or set in the secondary cell group. In order to change or update the security key of bearers (or bearers using RLC UM mode or bearers using RLC AM mode), the PDCP re-establishment procedure indicator is included in the RRC message or the terminal uses PDCP for the bearers A re-establishment procedure can also be performed. Alternatively, if security setting information is included in the message including the instruction to resume or activate the cell group, or if security setting information change (or update) is instructed, or the first PDCP resume procedure is instructed. When the indicator is included, the UE triggers the first PDCP resumption procedure for bearers (or bearers using the RLC UM mode or bearers using the RLC AM mode) configured in the secondary cell group, or in the PDCP layer device A first PDCP resumption procedure may be performed. However, if security setting information is not included in the message including the instruction to resume or activate the cell group, or if security setting information change (or update) is not instructed, or if the second PDCP resume procedure is instructed If the indicator is included, the UE transmits different data with the same security key when activating or resuming the secondary cell group to solve the security issue caused by bearers established in the secondary cell group (or using the RLC UM mode). or a bearer using the RLC AM mode), or the PDCP layer device may perform the second PDCP resume procedure. The methods proposed above may be performed when a message including an instruction to suspend or deactivate a cell group is received. In addition, the methods proposed above can be applied to SCG bearers (bearers having PDCP layer devices in SCG or SCG terminated bearers).

■ 2> Operation for signaling radio bearer (SRB) configured in the secondary cell group: The terminal transmits the configuration information or indicator in the above Receive and activate the PSCell, or if the activated downlink partial bandwidth of the PSCell is a normal partial bandwidth rather than a dormant partial bandwidth, or if the activated PSCell monitors the PDCCH at a long period based on the primary DRX configuration information, the secondary cell SRBs included in the group (or SN(SCG) terminated SRB or SRB or SRB3 in which PDCP layer device is configured in SCG) may be continuously maintained (eg, the terminal may transmit or receive a continuous control message with the secondary base station there is). Alternatively, a data discard procedure (eg, a discard instruction to a PDCP layer device or an RLC re-establishment procedure) is performed to discard old data (eg, PDCP SDU or PDCP PDU) stored in SRBs configured in the secondary cell group. can be done As another method, the terminal provides setting information or indicators in the above Upon reception, SRBs included in the secondary cell group (or SN(SCG) terminated SRB or SRB or SRB3 in which the PDCP layer device is configured in SCG) can be resumed. Alternatively, a data discard procedure (eg, a discard instruction to a PDCP layer device or an RLC re-establishment procedure) is performed to discard old data (eg, PDCP SDU or PDCP PDU) stored in SRBs configured in the secondary cell group. can be done For example, for a split bearer in which a PDCP layer device is configured in the master cell group (one RLC layer device is configured in the master cell group and another RLC layer device is configured in the secondary cell group), the configuration information or indicator In the included RRC message, an indicator (reestablishRLC) triggering a re-establishment procedure for the RLC layer device configured in the secondary cell group may be included, or the UE may perform a re-establishment procedure for the RLC layer device configured in the secondary cell group. there is. For example, for a split bearer in which a PDCP layer device is configured in a secondary cell group (one RLC layer device is configured in a master cell group and another RLC layer device is configured in a secondary cell group), the configuration information or indicator In the included RRC message, an indicator (reestablishRLC) triggering a re-establishment procedure for an RLC layer device configured in the master cell group may be included, or a PDCP re-establish procedure (reestablishPDCP) or PDCP resume procedure in a PDCP layer device configured in the secondary cell group. An indicator triggering (PDCP resume) may also be included, or the UE performs a re-establishment procedure for an RLC layer device configured in the master cell group, or a PDCP re-establishment procedure in a PDCP layer device configured in the secondary cell group. Alternatively, a PDCP resume procedure (PDCP resume) may be performed. For example, bearers may be resumed for a bearer configured in a secondary cell group, or an RRC layer device may instruct a PDCP layer device to trigger a PDCP re-establishment procedure or a PDCP resume procedure, or a PDCP layer device may instruct a PDCP layer device to trigger a PDCP re-establishment procedure or a PDCP resume procedure. A re-establishment procedure or a PDCP resume procedure may be performed. In the above, the UE may trigger the first PDCP resume procedure for bearers configured in the secondary cell group or may perform the first PDCP resume procedure in the PDCP layer device. As another method, in order to solve a security issue caused by transmitting different data with the same security key when the UE activates or resumes the secondary cell group, the second PDCP resume procedure is performed for bearers configured in the secondary cell group. may trigger or perform a second PDCP resume procedure in the PDCP layer device. Alternatively, when the upper layer device triggers the PDCP layer device resume procedure, the first PDCP resume procedure may be triggered and performed, the upper layer device triggers the PDCP layer device resume procedure, or the cell group ( Alternatively, when an indicator for activating or resuming a cell) is indicated, the second PDCP resumption procedure may be triggered and performed. Alternatively, in order to solve the security issue caused by transmitting different data with the same security key, the cell group (or cell) In the RRC message including the indicator for activating or resuming, a new security key may be set including security key setting information (eg sk-counter), and the security key may be changed or updated, or a bearer established in a secondary cell group A PDCP re-establishment procedure indicator may be included in the RRC message in order to change or update the security key of the UE, or the UE may perform a PDCP re-establishment procedure for the bearers. As another method, if security setting information is included in the message including the instruction to resume or activate the cell group, or if security setting information change (or update) is instructed, or if the first PDCP resume procedure is instructed If the indicator is included, the UE may trigger the first PDCP resume procedure for bearers configured in the secondary cell group or perform the first PDCP resume procedure in the PDCP layer device. However, if security setting information is not included in the message including the instruction to resume or activate the cell group, or if security setting information change (or update) is not instructed, or if the second PDCP resume procedure is instructed If the indicator is included, the terminal resumes PDCP for the bearers configured in the secondary cell group in order to solve the security issue caused by transmitting different data with the same security key when activating or resuming the secondary cell group. triggering the procedure or the PDCP layer device may perform the second PDCP resume procedure. The methods proposed above may be performed when a message including an instruction to suspend or deactivate a cell group is received. In addition, the methods proposed above can be applied to SCG bearers (bearers having PDCP layer devices in SCG or SCG terminated bearers).

■ 2> UE operation for the PUCCH SCell of the secondary cell group: When the UE receives the configuration information or indicator from above, it activates the PUCCH SCell of the secondary cell group, and the downlink partial bandwidth or uplink partial bandwidth is set in the RRC message. It can be activated with a bandwidth (eg, an initial activation partial bandwidth) and perform an activated SCell or terminal operation of the partial bandwidth. As another method, when the UE receives the configuration information or indicator from the above, if an idle partial bandwidth is configured for the PUCCH SCell of the secondary cell group, the SCell maintains an active state and sets the downlink partial bandwidth of the SCell to RRC. Activate with the partial bandwidth set in the message (e.g., the first activation partial bandwidth), and perform the terminal operation in the activated partial bandwidth, or if the SCell of the secondary cell group is not configured with a dormant partial bandwidth, The SCell is switched to an active state, the downlink partial bandwidth or the uplink partial bandwidth is activated to the partial bandwidth set in the RRC message (eg, the first active partial bandwidth), and the terminal operation of the activated SCell or partial bandwidth is performed. can As another method, when the terminal receives the setting information or indicator from above, the terminal determines the state of the SCell or switching or activating or deactivating the partial bandwidth according to the SCell setting information or indicator set in the message including the setting information or indicator, and the terminal operates can be performed. As another method, when the terminal receives the configuration information or indicator from above, the first DRX configuration information (eg, the second DRX configuration information set in the RRC message for the PUCCH SCell is stopped and the first DRX configuration information resetting to ) and performing monitoring of the PDCCH, the terminal operation in the activated SCell can be performed.

■ 2> The terminal sends an indicator indicating that the cell group (eg, secondary cell group) or cell has been set, added, activated, resumed, changed, or reset, to the master cell group or secondary cell group. The indicator may be transmitted as a physical signal (eg, HARQ ACK or NACK or new transmission resource), as MAC control information, or as an RRC message. ) can be transmitted.

■ 2> The terminal sends an indicator to restart, activate, or add a cell group (eg, secondary cell group) or a cell in the above Upon reception, the UE triggers a PDCP status report in the PDCP layer device for the configured SCG bearers or bearers connected to the SCG RLC layer device, or SCG split bearers, MCG bearers, or MCG split bearers, and reports it to the base station. . Because the PDCP status report is transmitted, it is possible to check the state of lost data or window variables between the terminal and the base station, so that the transmission window or the reception window can be synchronized.

- 1> If the dual access technology or cell group (eg, secondary cell group) or cell is released or deactivated or reset or suspended, configuration information or indicator (eg, DCI of PDCCH or MAC control information or RRC message) if the terminal receives, the terminal may perform some of the following procedures.

■ 2> An upper layer device (eg, RRC layer device) may instruct a lower layer device (eg, PDCP layer device or RLC layer device or MAC layer device or PHY layer device) with the setting information or indicator. there is.

■ 2> Operation of the UE for the PSCell: When the UE receives the configuration information or indicator from above, the UE maintains the PSCell in an active state, activates the downlink partial bandwidth of the PSCell to the dormant partial bandwidth set in the RRC message, and in the dormant partial bandwidth The terminal operation of can be performed. In another method, when the terminal receives the configuration information or indicator from above, the PSCell is maintained in an active state, and the PDCCH monitoring cycle or DRX configuration cycle of the PSCell is reset or switched to a very long cycle based on the second DRX configuration information, PDCCH monitoring may be performed and UE operation of an active cell may be performed. As another method, the terminal may deactivate the PSCell and perform the terminal operation of the deactivated cell when receiving the configuration information or indicator as described above. Power consumption of the UE can be reduced by performing the UE operation for the PSCell in the same manner as described above.

■ 2> Terminal operation for the SCell of the secondary cell group: When the terminal receives the configuration information or indicator described above, it can deactivate the SCell of the secondary cell group and perform the terminal operation of the deactivated SCell. As another method, when the terminal receives the configuration information or indicator from the above, if a dormant partial bandwidth is set in the SCell of the secondary cell group, the SCell maintains an active state and uses the downlink partial bandwidth of the SCell as the dormant partial bandwidth. activation, and can perform UE operation in the idle partial bandwidth, or if the idle partial bandwidth is not set for the SCell of the secondary cell group, convert the SCell into a deactivated state and the UE in the deactivated cell or partial bandwidth action can be performed. As another method, when the terminal receives the setting information or indicator from above, the terminal determines the state of the SCell or switching or activating or deactivating the partial bandwidth according to the SCell setting information or indicator set in the message including the setting information or indicator, and the terminal operates can be performed.

■ 2> Terminal operation of the MAC layer device for the secondary cell group: The terminal receives the setting information or indicator from the above Upon reception, an initialization procedure (MAC reset) may be performed on the MAC layer device (eg, configuration information set in the MAC layer device may be initialized or released, set timers may be stopped or initialized, or HARQ procedure may be performed). can also be stopped or initialized). For example, it may be considered that a timing advance timer (TAT) timer indicating the validity of signal synchronization between the terminal and the base station is stopped or expired. As another method, in order to prevent data loss due to the initialization procedure of the MAC layer device, the terminal may perform a MAC partial initialization procedure upon receiving the configuration information or indicator from above (or a message including the configuration information or indicator). If an indicator indicating the MAC partial initialization procedure is included in , the MAC partial initialization procedure may be performed). For example, a timing advance timer (TAT) timer indicating the validity of signal synchronization between the terminal and the base station may be continuously maintained or HARQ retransmission may be continuously performed during retransmission. Alternatively, the current configuration may be maintained without performing any procedure on the MAC layer device. In the case where the TAT timer is continuously maintained, if the TAT timer expires, the UE may perform a random access procedure to adjust or set a timing advance (TA) again even if the secondary cell group is stopped or deactivated. In the above, when performing the random access procedure, the terminal indicates to the base station that it was a random access procedure for adjusting the TA with an indicator (eg, transmits including a buffer status report (MAC control information) and indicates that there is no data to be transmitted). or a new indicator may be introduced), or the base station may transmit a message including an instruction to stop or deactivate the cell group to the terminal again after completing the random access procedure, or After completing the random access procedure, the terminal may maintain the cell group in a suspended or deactivated state (or, alternatively, the terminal may maintain the cell group in a suspended or deactivated state without an instruction from the base station). As another method, in the case where the TAT timer is continuously maintained, if the TAT timer expires, the base station operates the same TAT timer, so the master cell group or the secondary cell group is transmitted through the cell (PCell, SCell, or PSCell) to the UE. A random access procedure (for TA adjustment or reconfiguration) may be triggered or a message including an indicator to resume or activate a cell group may be transmitted to the UE. If the cell group (eg, secondary cell group) is configured (or instructed) to be activated in the above (or if the state of the cell group is not set to an inactive state in the above), the UE initializes the MAC layer device (MAC reset )can do. In the above, the MAC layer device initialization (MAC reset) procedure is performed after the terminal determines whether or not to perform the random access procedure, or after triggering the random access procedure, or when the random access procedure is successfully completed (or after completion), or the random access procedure It may also be performed when the cellgroup is activated without a random access procedure or when the cellgroup is successfully activated without a random access procedure (eg, PDCCH successful reception or transmission resource reception). This is because when activating a cell group, if the MAC layer device is initialized first, it is considered that the TAT (TimeAlignmentTimer) timer associated with the PTAG (or PSCell) has expired, and thus activating the cell group without the random access procedure proposed in the present disclosure. This is because the procedure cannot be performed (that is, the cell group can be activated without the random access procedure only when the TAT timer is running). Alternatively, a partial MAC reset of the MAC layer device may be performed instead of the MAC layer device initialization procedure. As suggested above, if the MAC layer device is not initialized or partially initialized, the data stored in the downlink buffer of the terminal is not flushed, so data can be stored later (for example, after cell group activation). An error may occur in soft combining when receiving, or data in the uplink buffer (e.g., message3 buffer or messageA buffer) may not be erased later (e.g., when cell group is activated or later). E) When sending data, old data may be transmitted and an error may occur.

■ 2> Operation for a data radio bearer (DRB) configured in the secondary cell group (or a bearer using the RLC UM mode or a bearer using the RLC AM mode): The terminal transmits the configuration information or indicator as described above Upon reception, DRBs included in the secondary cell group (or SN(SCG) terminated DRBs or DRBs in which PDCP layer devices are configured in SCGs or bearers using RLC UM mode or bearers using RLC AM mode) can be stopped. For example, for a split bearer in which a PDCP layer device is configured in the master cell group (one RLC layer device is configured in the master cell group and another RLC layer device is configured in the secondary cell group), the configuration information or indicator In the included RRC message, an indicator (reestablishRLC) triggering a re-establishment procedure for the RLC layer device configured in the secondary cell group may be included, or triggering a PDCP data recovery procedure in the PDCP layer device configured in the master cell group. may be included together, or the UE may perform a re-establishment procedure on the RLC layer device configured in the secondary cell group or perform a PDCP data recovery procedure in the PDCP layer device configured in the master cell group. can For example, for a split bearer in which a PDCP layer device is configured in a secondary cell group (one RLC layer device is configured in a master cell group and another RLC layer device is configured in a secondary cell group), the configuration information or indicator In the included RRC message, an indicator (reestablishRLC) triggering a re-establishment procedure for an RLC layer device configured in the master cell group may be included, or a PDCP re-establish procedure (reestablishPDCP) or PDCP stop procedure in a PDCP layer device configured in the secondary cell group. An indicator triggering (PDCP suspend) may be included together, or the UE performs a re-establishment procedure for an RLC layer device configured in the master cell group, or a PDCP re-establishment procedure or PDCP in a PDCP layer device configured in the secondary cell group A suspension procedure (PDCP suspend) can be performed. For example, for a bearer established in a secondary cell group (or a bearer using RLC UM mode or a bearer using RLC AM mode), bearers may be suspended, or a PDCP re-establishment procedure or It may be instructed to trigger a PDCP suspend procedure, or a PDCP layer device may perform a PDCP re-establishment procedure or a PDCP suspend procedure (PDCP suspend). In the above, the UE triggers the first PDCP suspension procedure for bearers configured in the secondary cell group (or bearers using the RLC UM mode or bearers using the RLC AM mode), or the first PDCP suspension in the PDCP layer device procedures can also be performed. As another method, in order to solve the security issue caused by transmitting different data with the same security key when the terminal activates or resumes the secondary cell group, bearers configured in the secondary cell group (or using the RLC UM mode) bearer or a bearer using RLC AM mode), or the PDCP layer device may perform the second PDCP suspension procedure. Alternatively, when the upper layer device triggers the PDCP layer device stop procedure, the first PDCP stop procedure may be triggered and performed, the upper layer device triggers the PDCP layer device stop procedure, or the cell group ( Alternatively, when an indicator for inactivating or stopping a cell) is indicated, a second PDCP stopping procedure may be triggered and performed. Alternatively, if security setting information is included in the message including an instruction to suspend or deactivate the cell group, or if a change (or update) of security setting information is instructed, or if the first PDCP suspension procedure is instructed If the indicator is included, the UE triggers the first PDCP suspension procedure for bearers configured in the secondary cell group (or bearers using the RLC UM mode or bearers using the RLC AM mode), or in the PDCP layer device A first PDCP suspension procedure may be performed. However, if security setting information is not included in the message including the instruction to stop or deactivate the cell group, or if security setting information change (or update) is not instructed, or if the second PDCP suspension procedure is instructed If the indicator is included, the UE transmits different data with the same security key when activating or resuming the secondary cell group to solve the security issue caused by bearers established in the secondary cell group (or using the RLC UM mode). or a bearer using the RLC AM mode), or the PDCP layer device may perform the second PDCP suspension procedure. The methods proposed above may be performed when a message including an instruction to resume or activate a cell group is received. In addition, the methods proposed above can be applied to SCG bearers (bearers having PDCP layer devices in SCG or SCG terminated bearers).

■ 2> Operation for signaling radio bearer (SRB) configured in the secondary cell group: The terminal transmits the configuration information or indicator in the above receive and activate the PSCell, or if the activated downlink partial bandwidth of the PSCell is a normal partial bandwidth rather than a dormant partial bandwidth, or if the activated PSCell monitors the PDCCH at a long period based on the secondary DRX configuration information, the secondary cell group Included SRBs (or SN(SCG) terminated SRB or SRB or SRB3 in which PDCP layer device is configured in SCG) may be continuously maintained without stopping (eg, when the terminal continuously transmits or receives a control message with the secondary base station) may be). Alternatively, a data discard procedure (eg, a discard instruction to a PDCP layer device or an RLC re-establishment procedure) is performed to discard old data (eg, PDCP SDU or PDCP PDU) stored in SRBs configured in the secondary cell group. can be done As another method, the terminal provides setting information or indicators in the above Upon reception, SRBs included in the secondary cell group (or SN(SCG) terminated SRB or SRB or SRB3 in which the PDCP layer device is configured in SCG) can be stopped. Alternatively, a data discard procedure (eg, a discard instruction to a PDCP layer device or an RLC re-establishment procedure) is performed to discard old data (eg, PDCP SDU or PDCP PDU) stored in SRBs configured in the secondary cell group. can be done For example, for a split SRB bearer in which a PDCP layer device is configured in a master cell group (one RLC layer device is configured in a master cell group and another RLC layer device is configured in a secondary cell group), the configuration information or indicator An indicator (reestablishRLC) for triggering a re-establishment procedure for an RLC layer device configured in the secondary cell group may be included in the RRC message including, or a PDCP data recovery procedure in the PDCP layer device configured in the master cell group. may be included together, or the UE performs a re-establishment procedure on the RLC layer device configured in the secondary cell group, or a PDCP data recovery procedure in the PDCP layer device configured in the master cell group can be performed. For example, for a split bearer in which a PDCP layer device is configured in a secondary cell group (one RLC layer device is configured in a master cell group and another RLC layer device is configured in a secondary cell group), the configuration information or indicator In the included RRC message, an indicator (reestablishRLC) triggering a re-establishment procedure for the RLC layer device configured in the master cell group may be included, or a PDCP re-establishment procedure (reestablishPDCP) or PDCP suspension in the PDCP layer device configured in the secondary cell group. An indicator triggering a procedure (PDCP suspend) may be included, or the UE performs a re-establishment procedure for an RLC layer device configured in the master cell group, or a PDCP re-establishment procedure in a PDCP layer device configured in the secondary cell group Alternatively, a PDCP suspend procedure (PDCP suspend) may be performed. For example, for a bearer configured in a secondary cell group, the bearers may be suspended, or the RRC layer device may instruct the PDCP layer device to trigger a PDCP re-establishment procedure or a PDCP suspension procedure, or the PDCP layer device may instruct the PDCP layer device to trigger a PDCP re-establishment procedure. procedure or PDCP suspend procedure. In the above, the terminal may trigger the first PDCP suspension procedure for the bearers configured in the secondary cell group or may perform the first PDCP suspension procedure in the PDCP layer device. As another method, in order to solve a security issue caused by transmitting different data with the same security key when the UE activates or resumes the secondary cell group, a second PDCP suspension procedure is performed for bearers configured in the secondary cell group. may trigger or perform a second PDCP stop procedure in the PDCP layer device. Alternatively, when the upper layer device triggers the PDCP layer device stop procedure, the first PDCP layer device may be triggered and performed, and the upper layer device triggers the PDCP layer device stop procedure or the cell group (or cell) may trigger and perform the second PDCP suspension procedure when an indicator for inactivating or stopping the cell) is indicated. Alternatively, if security setting information is included in the message including an instruction to suspend or deactivate the cell group, or if a change (or update) of security setting information is instructed, or if the first PDCP suspension procedure is instructed When the indicator is included, the UE may trigger the first PDCP suspension procedure for the bearers configured in the secondary cell group or may perform the first PDCP suspension procedure in the PDCP layer device. However, if security setting information is not included in the message including the instruction to stop or deactivate the cell group, or if security setting information change (or update) is not instructed, or if the second PDCP suspension procedure is instructed If the indicator is included, the UE transmits different data with the same security key when activating or resuming the secondary cell group to solve the security issue caused by the second PDCP suspension for the bearers configured in the secondary cell group. triggering the procedure or the PDCP layer device may perform the second PDCP suspension procedure. The methods proposed above may be performed when a message including an instruction to resume or activate a cell group is received. In addition, the methods proposed above can be applied to SCG bearers (bearers having PDCP layer devices in SCG or SCG terminated bearers).

■ 2> UE operation for the PUCCH SCell of the secondary cell group: When the UE receives the configuration information or indicator described above, it can deactivate the PUCCH SCell of the secondary cell group and perform the UE operation of the deactivated SCell. As another method, when the terminal receives the configuration information or indicator from the above, if a dormant part bandwidth is set in the PUCCH SCell of the secondary cell group, the SCell is maintained in an active state and the downlink part bandwidth of the SCell is set to the dormant part. bandwidth, and can perform UE operation in the idle partial bandwidth, or if the idle partial bandwidth is not set in the PUCCH SCell of the secondary cell group, the SCell is switched to a deactivated state and the deactivated cell or partial bandwidth It is possible to perform a terminal operation in . As another method, when the terminal receives the setting information or indicator from above, the terminal determines the status of the SCell or switching, activation or deactivation of the partial bandwidth according to the SCell setting information or indicator set in the message including the setting information or indicator, and performs the terminal operation. can be done As another method, when the terminal receives the configuration information or indicator from above, the UE applies the second DRX configuration information set in the RRC message to the PUCCH SCell and monitors the PDCCH based on a long period. The terminal operation of can be performed.

■ 2> The terminal may transmit, to the master cell group or the secondary cell group, an indicator indicating that the cell group (eg, secondary cell group) or cell has been suspended, deactivated, released, or changed. The indicator may be transmitted by the UE to the secondary cell group (or base station) or master cell group (or base station) as a physical signal (eg, HARQ ACK or NACK or new transmission resource), as MAC control information, or as an RRC message. .

■ 2> The terminal receives an indicator to stop, deactivate, or release the cell group (eg, secondary cell group) or cell in the above Upon reception, the UE triggers a PDCP status report in the PDCP layer device for the configured SCG bearers or bearers connected to the SCG RLC layer device, or SCG split bearers, MCG bearers, or MCG split bearers, and reports it to the base station. . Because the PDCP status report is transmitted, it is possible to check the state of lost data or window variables between the terminal and the base station, so that the transmission window or the reception window can be synchronized.

The partial reset of the MAC layer device proposed in the present disclosure may include one or a plurality of terminal operations among the following procedures.

- The terminal performs an operation to flush the rest of the HARQ processes (i.e., general HARQ process or HARQ process for system information, etc.) except for the HARQ process for MBS among the HARQ processes set in the serving cell, and the HARQ process for MBS After completion of over or after RRC state mode transition (to RRC inactive mode or RRC idle mode), empty (flush), release (flush), initialize (flush), or perform an operation to omit flushing.

- In the case of flush operation, G-RNTI monitoring is started at the time when MBS service reception is possible in the target base station after handover completion or after RRC state mode transition (RRC inactive mode or RRC idle mode) At that point, data of the HARQ process related to MBS can be flushed. Alternatively, data reception through the G-RNTI may be continued until handover is completed or until the RRC state mode transition (RRC inactive mode or RRC idle mode) is completed, and in case of handover, the target base station can perform an operation of monitoring the C-RNTI in the target allocated through the RRC message. Alternatively, data reception through the G-RNTI can be continued even before random access from the target base station is completed. .

- If there is a random access procedure in progress, it can be stopped.

- If there is a specifically set or indicated preamble identifier or preamble configuration information or PRACH (random access configuration related information) configuration information, it can be discarded.

- If there is a temporary cell identifier (Temporary C-RNTI), it can be released.

- The buffer for message 3 transmission can be flushed.

- All New data indicator indicators for the HARQ process for uplink can be set to 0.

- If the running uplink DRX retransmission timer for uplink is running, it can be stopped.

- If all uplink HARQ related timers are running, they can be stopped.

- All TAT timers (for example, TAT timers related to secondary timing advance group (STAG)) other than the TAT (time alignment timer) timer related to the cell (PSCell) or PTAG (primary timing advance group) are considered to have expired or stop (if the TAT timers have been set). For example, the TAT timer related to the PTAG may be continuously maintained without stopping so that when the terminal activates the cell or cell group again, it may be quickly activated without a random access procedure. Also, a TAT timer associated with a secondary timing advance group (STAG) may be stopped or considered expired to eliminate unnecessary terminal procedures (if the TAT timers are set). If the time alignment timer (TAT) timer related to the primary timing advance group (PTAG) has expired in the inactive cell or cell group, the MAC layer device indicates that the TAT has expired, and the upper layer device (eg, RRC layer device) ) can be indicated. Alternatively, if a time alignment timer (TAT) timer related to a primary timing advance group (PTAG) has expired in the inactive cell or cell group, the UE may stop the beam failure detection procedure or the RLM procedure (or if the beam failure occurs may have occurred or the wireless connection may be considered invalid). Alternatively, if the UE detects a beam failure, the UE may stop the TAT timer associated with the PTAG (or consider it to have expired) or stop the RLM procedure. Alternatively, if the terminal detects a radio connection failure, it may stop the TAT timer related to the PTAG (or consider it to have expired) or stop the beam failure detection procedure (or consider that a beam failure has occurred).

In the case of performing the initialization procedure of the MAC layer device in the above, or when the partial initialization procedure indicator of the MAC layer device is not included, or is not indicated or is not performed, the terminal performs the initialization procedure of the entire MAC layer device, Accordingly, the terminal may flush all of the set general HARQ process, MBS HARQ process, or system information HARQ process.

Hereinafter, if a cell group (or SCG) is set to an inactive state, a beam failure detection procedure is set, or an RLM procedure is set in an RRC message to a terminal where dual access technology is set as proposed above, MAC It proposes the procedures of layer devices. For example, it is proposed that the UE performs different beam failure detection procedures or beam failure recovery procedures depending on whether the state of the cell group set in the RRC message is in an inactive state or an active state.

-1> If the UE receives an RRC message, and if a beam failure detection procedure, a first BFR procedure, or a second BFR procedure is set in the RRC message, or a cell (PSCell or SCell) in which the beam failure detection procedure is set, or If the cell group is not set to inactive state (or if it is set to active state)

■ 2> The terminal performs a beam failure detection procedure.

■ 2> If beam failure is detected for the cell (PSCell or SCell) or cell group

◆ 3> Perform the first BFR procedure or the second BFR procedure proposed in the present disclosure.

■ 2> If a problem with the random access procedure is detected due to beam failure

◆ 3> The terminal reports the random access procedure problem due to the beam failure to the base station.

- 1> Otherwise, if the UE receives an RRC message, and a beam failure detection procedure or a first BFR procedure or a second BFR procedure is set in the RRC message, or a cell (PSCell or SCell) or cell in the RRC message If a group (or SCG) is set to an inactive state, and a beam failure detection procedure, a first BFR procedure, or a second BFR procedure is configured for the cell group, or the cell or cell group for which the beam failure detection procedure is set is inactive if set to

■ 2> The terminal performs a beam failure detection procedure.

■ 2> If beam failure is detected for the cell (PSCell or SCell) or cell group

◆ 3> Do not perform the first BFR procedure or the second BFR procedure proposed in the present disclosure. This is because a random access procedure may be unnecessarily triggered for the deactivated cell group. The MAC layer device may indicate or report that a beam failure has been detected to a higher layer device (or RRC layer device).

■ 2> If beam failure is detected for the deactivated cell group (SCG) or cell (PSCell) or MAC layer device

◆ 3> The UE reports the beam failure to the base station (or MCG). For example, the beam failure may be included in an SCG failure report message (SCGFailureInformation) and transmitted to the base station for reporting.

■ 2> If a problem with the random access procedure is detected due to beam failure

◆ 3> The terminal reports the random access procedure problem due to the beam failure to the base station.

In the present disclosure, when the beam failure detection procedure is set in the RRC message, a detailed procedure for the beam failure detection procedure of the MAC layer device of the terminal proposed above is proposed.

- 1> If an indication that a beam failure has occurred is received from a lower layer device

■ 2> A timer (BeamFailureDetectionTimer) for beam failure detection can be started or restarted. (The timer can be set in the RRC message.)

■ 2> Increase the value of the variable (BFI_COUNTER) to count the number of beam failures by 1.

■ 2> If the variable value for counting the number of beam failures is greater than or equal to the maximum number of beam failures (beamFailureInstanceMaxCount) (the maximum number of beam failures can be set in the RRC message).

◆ 3> If (if) the serving cell (the cell in which the beam failure occurred) is the SCell

● 4> A beam failure recovery (BFR) procedure may be triggered or performed for the cell.

◆ 3> Otherwise, if (else if), the serving cell (the cell in which beam failure occurred above) is a PSCell or a deactivated cell group or a cell (PSCell) of a deactivated cell group

● 4> An upper layer device (eg, RRC layer device) may indicate that beam failure has occurred with respect to the cell.

● 4> It can be considered that the TAT (time alignment timer) timer corresponding to (or related to) PTAG (primary timing advance group) has expired. Alternatively, the TAT timer related to the PTAG may be stopped. This is because it is possible to determine that the TA value is no longer valid if beam failure occurs for the inactive cell group or cell, and thus the TAT timer does not need to be driven unnecessarily. Alternatively, the RLM procedure may also be stopped or a radio connection failure may be declared. This is because if a beam failure occurs for a deactivated cell group or cell, it can be considered that the radio connection is no longer valid.

◆ 3> otherwise (else)

● 4> A random access procedure may be started or performed for the SpCell.

The beam failure recovery (BFR) proposed in the present disclosure is as follows.

In the present disclosure, the first BFR procedure (eg, Rel-15 beam failure recovery (BFR)) is possible only for PCell or SpCell. That is, when a beam failure occurs in a connected mode terminal, a random access procedure is performed. In the above, the random access procedure depends on whether a preamble for BFR is set in the RRC message. The preamble may be set for each beam. And if the preamble for the BFR is set, a search space for the BFR is also set. When the preamble for BFR is set as described above, CFRA is performed. That is, if a failure occurs in beam 1, a beam is searched, and if it is determined that a beam is valid in beam 3, it is checked whether a preamble for BFR is set in beam 3, and if so, CFRA is performed using the preamble. Then, it waits for a response and monitors the PDCCH in the search space set above. When the UE performs random access in the preamble, the base station recognizes that a beam failure has occurred and gives PDCCH scheduling (DL assignment or UL grant) to the UE. Then, the terminal continues to transmit or receive data on that beam, and the beam is restored. (In the CFRA, since the base station accurately knows the beam failure, there is no need to transmit RAR for TA reset.)

If the preamble for BFR is not configured in the RRC message, CBRA is performed. That is, if a failure occurs in beam 1, a beam is searched, and if it is determined that a beam is valid in beam 3, it is checked whether a preamble for BFR is set in beam 3, and if it is not set, CBRA is performed. Then wait for response and wait for RAR. The base station does not know why the terminal suddenly performed random access, but gives RAR and completes the random access procedure. Then, the terminal performs data transmission/reception of the PDCCH indication on the beam, and the beam is restored.

BeamFailureRecoveryConfig for the first BFR procedure (eg, Rel-15 beam failure recovery (BFR)) or SpCell is set in UL BWP. This is because when BFR is triggered, a BFR dedicated preamble can be set.

The second BFR procedure (Rel-16 beam failure recovery procedure (BFR)) of the present disclosure is possible not only for the SpCell but also for the SCell. With the RRC message, a dedicated SR (scheduling request or PUCCH transmission resource) for BFR may be configured for each cell and each sub-bandwidth. If a beam failure occurs for any part of the bandwidth of the SCell, a BFR MAC control element (CE) is generated. And if beam failure occurs for the partial bandwidth and if the dedicated SR is configured (PCell or PUCCH SR), the SR is transmitted on PUCCH. And if the beam failure report continues to fail in the dedicated SR, a random access procedure is performed with CBRA. If the number of SRs is exceeded, only CBRA can be performed similarly even if legacy sends BSR. In the above, the random access procedure is performed in the PCell. Therefore, when sending the MAC CE through the PCell with respect to the SCell, which SCell failed, and if the terminal is found to be valid among the TCI sets (or TCI states) set by RRC, for each SCell A valid beam can be reported optionally. In the above, if the terminal transmits a MAC CE including a valid beam for the SCell, when receiving a HARQ ACK for the MAC PDU including the MAC CE, the terminal and the base station use the valid beam for the SCell will do If a valid beam is not included in MAC CE for the SCell, the base station may designate a beam as DCI of PDCCH or TCI state MAC CE in response.

In addition, in the second BFR procedure (Rel-16 beam failure recovery procedure (BFR)), the BFR procedure for SpCell can also be improved.

For example, a second BFR procedure (Rel-16 Beam Failure Recovery Procedure (BFR)) is possible as Rel-15 for PCell or SpCell. That is, when a beam failure occurs, a random access procedure is performed. In the above, the random access procedure differs depending on whether a preamble for BFR is configured. The preamble may be set for each beam. And if the preamble for the BFR is set, a search space for the BFR is also set. When the preamble for BFR is set as described above, CFRA is performed with the preamble. That is, if a failure occurs in beam 1, a beam is searched, and if it is determined that a beam is valid in beam 3, it is checked whether a preamble for BFR is set in beam 3, and if so, CFRA is performed. Then, it waits for a beam response and monitors the PDCCH in the search space set above. When the UE performs random access in the preamble, the base station recognizes that a beam failure has occurred and gives PDCCH scheduling (DL assignment or UL grant) to the UE. Then, the terminal continues to transmit or receive data on the beam and the beam is restored (in the CFRA, since the base station accurately recognizes beam failure, there is no need to transmit RAR for TA reset).

If the preamble for BFR is not set in the above, CBRA is performed. That is, if a failure occurs in beam 1, a beam is searched, and if it is determined that a beam is valid in beam 3, it is checked whether a preamble for BFR is set in beam 3, and if it is not set, CBRA is performed. Then wait for response and wait for RAR. The base station does not know why the terminal suddenly performed random access, but gives RAR. After receiving the RAR, the base station generates a BFR MAC CE and transmits it in Msg3. However, beams valid for SpCell cannot be included in the MAC CE. This is because, unlike SCell, PCell sends BFR MAC CE for BFR generated in PCell. That is, when a beam failure occurs in the PCell, the terminal searches for a valid beam and transmits a preamble to the valid beam, so the base station and the terminal already know the valid beam for the PCell in the random access procedure. That is, it includes already valid beams. Accordingly, upon completion of the random access procedure, the terminal performs data transmission/reception on beam #3 and the beam is restored.

That is, when BFR is triggered for the Rel-16 SpCell, random access is triggered unconditionally regardless of SR, and a BFR MAC CE is configured (if the preamble for BFR is not set) and transmitted. And in the RRC message for Rel-16 BFR or SCell, BeamFailureRecoverySCellConfig is set to DL BWP. This is to set candidate RS that can be included in BFR MAC CE when BFR is triggered. The dedicated SR for the SCell BFR is included in MAC-CellGroupConfig in the RRC message. For example, it can be set in schedulingRequestConfig.

In addition, in the RRC message, the base station may configure a beam failure RS so that the UE can check beam failure. If all of the RSs fail, the UE detects beam failure and performs a random access procedure.

If the base station has set a preamble for beam failure recovery in advance, the random access procedure above performs CFRA, and the base station can see the preamble and know whether the terminal has performed the random access procedure for beam recovery.

However, if the base station does not set the preamble for beam failure recovery in advance, the terminal performs CBRA. This is indistinguishable from the point of view of the base station that BSR is triggered and a random access procedure is triggered to transmit uplink data in a state where SR is not set. However, seeing that the terminal suddenly performed a random access procedure, it can determine one of the above two, receive BSR information if there is a BSR, recognize it as a BFR if there is no BSR, read the BSR even if the above two cases are triggered at the same time, The base station can make an implicit determination by looking at the preamble. When the UE reads the SSB, it can know how many beams there are and which beams are transmitted at which period and for which time and frequency resources. In addition, the intensity of the beam may be measured and a random access procedure may be performed on a beam exceeding a predetermined standard. When a certain beam is selected, random access can be performed on the beam in consideration of the time, frequency resource, or period.

Hereinafter, when the state of a cell group is set to an active or inactive state, or when a PSCell of a cell group is set to an active or inactive state, procedures to be performed by the UE are proposed. In the above, the terminal may receive an indication of an activation state or a deactivation state through an RRC message (RRCReconfiguration or RRCResume), MAC control information, or PDCCH DCI for a cell group or cell (PSCell). For example, when the RRC message (RRCReconfiguration or RRCResume) or MAC control information or PDCCH DCI is set to an inactive state, the cell group (or SCG) or cell (or PSCell) can be deactivated, and the RRC message (RRCReconfiguration or RRCResume) or MAC control information or PDCCH DCI, if it is not set to an inactive state (or if it is set to an active state), the cell group or cell can be activated.

In the present disclosure, a UE operation when receiving an instruction to activate a cell group or cell (or when an instruction to deactivate is not received) is as follows.

- If the instruction to activate the cell group (or SCG) or cell (or PSCell) of the terminal is received as a DCI (L1 control signal) or MAC CE or RRC message of the PDCCH (or if the instruction to deactivate is not received), then One or more of the operations of may be performed.

■ Activate the cell group or cell.

■ Switches to the uplink partial bandwidth or downlink partial bandwidth set in the RRC message (eg, first active downlink partial bandwidth or first active uplink partial bandwidth) or activates. Alternatively, by performing a random access procedure (or when reconfigurationWithSync is set, or when beam failure is detected, or when radio connection failure is detected, or when the TAT timer is not running (or expires), the cell When activating a group or cell, switching to an uplink partial bandwidth or a downlink partial bandwidth set in the RRC message (eg, a first active downlink partial bandwidth or a first active uplink partial bandwidth or a newly defined partial bandwidth); or In addition, when performing a random access procedure, the random access procedure may be performed in the partial bandwidth. However, when the random access procedure is not performed (or when the random access procedure is set not to be performed or beam failure occurs) When not detected, when a radio connection failure is not detected, or when the TAT timer is running (or not expired), the terminal may activate the previously (or last) activated partial bandwidth.

■ Transmits a Sounding Reference Signal (SRS) so that the base station can perform channel measurement for uplink in the activated partial bandwidth. For example, it may transmit periodically.

■ If PUCCH is configured in the activated partial bandwidth, PUCCH transmission is performed.

■ If there is a type 1 setting transmission resource that has been suspended, the saved type 1 transmission resource can be initialized and used as the original setting. In the above, the type 1 configuration transmission resource is a periodic transmission resource (uplink or downlink) pre-allocated in an RRC message and means a transmission resource that can be activated and used by an RRC message.

■ Trigger PHR for the sub-bandwidth. The PHR may trigger on MCG or SCG. Also, the PHR may be reported as MCG or SCG.

■ In the activated partial bandwidth, the terminal can report a channel measurement result (CSI or CQI or PMI or RI or PTI or CRI, etc.) according to the base station setting for downlink.

■ The PDCCH is monitored to read the instructions of the base station in the activated partial bandwidth.

■ PDCCH is monitored to read cross scheduling for the activated partial bandwidth.

■ Start or restart the partial bandwidth deactivation timer in the above. Alternatively, the partial bandwidth deactivation timer may be started or restarted only when the partial bandwidth dormancy timer is not set. In the above, if the partial bandwidth dormancy timer can be set by an RRC message, the partial bandwidth can be switched to dormancy or dormant partial bandwidth when the timer expires. For example, the partial bandwidth inactivation timer may be started or restarted only in the dormant partial bandwidth.

In the present disclosure, a UE operation upon receiving an instruction to deactivate a cell group or cell is as follows.

- If an instruction to deactivate a cell group (or SCG) or cell (or PSCell) of the UE is received as a PDCCH DCI (L1 control signal) or MAC CE or RRC message, one or more of the following operations are performed can do.

■ Disable the cell group or cell or the uplink or downlink partial bandwidth indicated above.

■ All TAT timers (eg, TAT timers related to STAG (Secondary Timing Advance Group)) except for the TAT (Time Alignment Timer) timer related to the cell (PSCell) or PTAG (Primary Timing Advance Group) have expired Consider or stop (if the TAT timers have been set). For example, the TAT timer related to the PTAG may be continuously maintained without stopping so that when the terminal activates the cell or cell group again, it may be quickly activated without a random access procedure. Also, a TAT timer associated with a secondary timing advance group (STAG) may be stopped or considered expired to eliminate unnecessary terminal procedures (if the TAT timers are set). If the time alignment timer (TAT) timer related to the primary timing advance group (PTAG) has expired in the inactive cell or cell group, the MAC layer device indicates that the TAT has expired, and the upper layer device (eg, RRC layer device) ) can be indicated. Alternatively, if a time alignment timer (TAT) timer related to a primary timing advance group (PTAG) has expired in the inactive cell or cell group, the UE may stop the beam failure detection procedure or the RLM procedure (or if the beam failure occurs may have occurred or the wireless connection may be considered invalid). Alternatively, if the UE detects a beam failure, the UE may stop the TAT timer associated with the PTAG (or consider it to have expired) or stop the RLM procedure. Alternatively, if the terminal detects a radio connection failure, the terminal may stop the TAT timer related to the PTAG (or consider it to have expired) or stop the beam failure detection procedure (or consider that a beam failure has occurred). .

■ The terminal stops a partial bandwidth deactivation timer (eg, a deactivation timer for downlink partial bandwidth) set and running in the cell or partial bandwidth.

■ It is possible to clear periodic downlink transmission resources (DL SPS or configured downlink assignment) or configured periodic uplink transmission resources (UL SPS or configured uplink grant Type 2) set in the cell or partial bandwidth. In the above, the meaning of clear means that the terminal stores configuration information such as period information set in the RRC message, but information on periodic transmission resources indicated by L1 signaling (eg DCI) or activated is removed It means no longer in use. The periodic transmission resource may be referred to as a type 2 configuration transmission resource. Also, the operation of releasing the periodic transmission resource may be performed only when the Scell transitions from an active state to an inactive state. This is because, when transitioning from the dormant state to the inactive state, there is no need for a release operation because there is no periodic transmission resource in the dormant state. Alternatively, the periodic transmission resources may be released only when the periodic downlink transmission resources or the periodic uplink transmission resources are set or are set and used.

■ A periodic uplink transmission resource (configured uplink grant Type 1 set to RRC) configured in the cell or partial bandwidth can be suspended. In the above, the meaning of suspending means that the terminal stores the transmission resource setting information set in the RRC message, but does not use it anymore. The periodic transmission resource may be referred to as a type 1 configuration transmission resource. Also, the operation of releasing the periodic transmission resource may be performed only when the Scell transitions from an active state to an inactive state. This is because, when transitioning from the dormant state to the inactive state, there is no need for a release operation because there is no periodic transmission resource in the dormant state. Alternatively, the periodic transmission resources may be released only when the periodic downlink transmission resources or the periodic uplink transmission resources are set or are set and used.

■ All HARQ buffers configured for the cell or sub-bandwidth are emptied.

■ If there is a PUSCH transmission resource configured for semi-persistent CSI reporting for the cell or partial bandwidth, it is cleared.

■ The UE does not transmit SRS for the cell or partial bandwidth.

■ For the cell or partial bandwidth, the UE neither performs nor reports channel measurement (CSI or CQI or PMI or RI or PTI or CRI) for downlink.

■ Uplink data is not transmitted through UL-SCH in the cell or partial bandwidth.

■ A random access procedure is not performed on the cell or partial bandwidth.

■ The UE does not monitor the PDCCH in the cell or partial bandwidth.

■ The UE does not monitor the PDCCH for the cell or partial bandwidth. Also, even in the case of cross-scheduling, the PDCCH for the cell is not monitored in the cell to be scheduled.

■ PUCCH or SPUCCH transmission is not performed in the cell or partial bandwidth.

The first PDCP suspension (or resume) procedure proposed in the present disclosure may include one or a plurality of UE operations among the following procedures. The procedure proposed above may be applied or set to a bearer using the RLC UM mode or a bearer using the RLC AM mode, or the UE may use the procedure proposed for a bearer using the RLC UM mode or a bearer using the RLC AM mode can be performed.

- The transmission PDCP layer device of the terminal may initialize or set the transmission window variable to an initial value or discard stored data (eg, PDCP PDU or PDCP SDU). As another method, only the PDCP PDU may be discarded to prevent data loss. This is a procedure for preventing old data from being transmitted or retransmitted when the secondary cell group is activated or resumed later.

- If a reordering timer (t-reordering) (timer for sorting data in ascending order based on a PDCP serial number or COUNT value) is running, the receiving PDCP layer device of the terminal may stop or initialize the reordering timer. . Alternatively, a header decompression procedure may be performed on stored data (eg, PDCP SDU), and the data may be delivered to an upper layer device in ascending order of COUNT values. The receiving PDCP layer device of the terminal may initialize the receiving window variable or set it to an initial value.

The second PDCP suspension (or resume) procedure proposed in the present disclosure may include one or a plurality of UE operations among the following procedures. The procedure proposed above may be applied or set to a bearer using the RLC UM mode or a bearer using the RLC AM mode, or the UE may use the procedure proposed for a bearer using the RLC UM mode or a bearer using the RLC AM mode can be performed.

- The transmission PDCP layer device of the terminal may maintain the variable value without initializing the transmission window variable or setting it to an initial value. The reason for maintaining the variable value (eg, COUNT value) above is to prevent security issues caused by transmitting different data with the same security key (eg, COUNT value) when the secondary cell group is activated or resumed. is to solve In the above, the transmitting PDCP layer device of the terminal may discard the stored data (eg, PDCP PDU or PDCP SDU). As another method, only the PDCP PDU may be discarded to prevent data loss. This is a procedure for preventing old data from being transmitted or retransmitted when the secondary cell group is activated or resumed later. As another method, the transmitting PDCP layer device may store the values of the transmitting window variables and initialize the window variables (eg, set them to 0). In addition, if security setting information is changed when resuming or activating a cell group, or if security setting information is included in a message instructing resumption or activation of a cell group, or if a security key change is instructed, the window variables initialized above can be used. Alternatively, if security setting information is not changed when resuming or activating a cell group, or if security setting information is not included in a message instructing resumption or activation of a cell group, or if a security key change is not instructed, in the above The values of the stored transmission window variables may be restored, or the values of the transmission window variables stored above may be set, reset, or initialized and used.

- If a reordering timer (t-reordering) (timer for sorting data in ascending order based on a PDCP serial number or COUNT value) is running, the receiving PDCP layer device of the terminal may stop or initialize the reordering timer. . Alternatively, a header decompression procedure may be performed on stored data (eg, PDCP SDU), and the data may be delivered to an upper layer device in ascending order of COUNT values. The receiving PDCP layer device of the terminal may maintain the variable value without initializing the receiving window variable or setting it to an initial value. The reason for maintaining the variable value (eg, COUNT value) in the above is a security issue caused by transmitting different data with the same security key (eg, COUNT value) when the secondary cell group is activated or resumed. is to solve As another method, in the above, when the terminal activates or resumes the secondary cell group and receives data, the RX_NEXT window variable (next received variable indicating the COUNT value of the data expected to be received) as the value of the RX_DELIV window variable (a variable indicating the COUNT value corresponding to the next data of the data transmitted to the upper layer device) or the COUNT value of the first data received by the terminal. You can also set or update. Alternatively, when a reordering timer value is set in the above message or an indicator is received from a higher layer device, RX_REORD (a variable indicating the COUNT value of the next data after triggering the reordering timer) window variable is set to the RX_NEXT window variable. It can be set or updated to a variable value of or the reordering timer can be stopped or restarted.) Alternatively, the receiving PDCP layer device stores the values of the receiving window variables in the above and initializes the window variables (eg For example, set to 0). In addition, if security setting information is changed when resuming or activating a cell group, or if security setting information is included in a message instructing resumption or activation of a cell group, or if a security key change is instructed, the window variables initialized above can be used. Alternatively, if security setting information is not changed when resuming or activating a cell group, or if security setting information is not included in a message instructing resumption or activation of a cell group, or if a security key change is not instructed, in the above The stored values of the receiving window variables may be restored again, or the values of the receiving window variables stored above may be set, reset, or initialized and used.

Configuration information or indicator (eg, DCI of PDCCH or MAC control information or RRC message) is received by the UE and the UE performs the UE operation proposed above. Request) or MAC control information (or indicator or buffer amount or buffer status report) to the master base station or secondary base station to request uplink transmission resources or dual access technology or cell group (eg, secondary cell group) or request to set or add or activate or resume or change or reset a cell. As another method, configuration information or indicators (eg, DCI of PDCCH) for releasing or inactivating or resetting or stopping the dual access technology or cell group (eg, secondary cell group) or cell in the above Or MAC control information or RRC message) when the UE receives the UE and performs the UE operation proposed above, if the UE generates or generates data to transmit on the uplink, the UE generates an RRC message and the master Sending to a base station or secondary base station to request uplink transmission resources or to set up or add or activate or resume or change or reset a dual access technology or cell group (e.g. secondary cell group) or cell. can request

The procedures proposed in the present disclosure can be extended to multiple access technologies. For example, configuration information of a plurality of cell groups can be configured as an RRC message to the terminal, and one or a plurality of cell groups (or cells) among the configured plurality of cell groups can be transmitted as an indicator of PDCCH, MAC control information, or RRC message. It can be activated or resumed, or one or more cell groups can be suspended or deactivated.

Hereinafter, when the secondary cell group or the PSCell of the secondary cell group is in an inactive state or a suspended state due to the cell group or cell deactivation or suspension procedure proposed in the present disclosure, the terminal is responsible for the secondary cell group (or the secondary cell group). When uplink data is generated or generated in bearers belonging to), a terminal operation for re-activating or resuming the cell group or cell is proposed.

As suggested in the present disclosure, if uplink data is generated in the secondary cell group of the UE (or in bearers belonging to the secondary cell group), the UE cannot transmit or receive data if the cell group or cell is deactivated or stopped. It is necessary to activate or resume the cell group or cell again. In the above, the procedure of requesting the base station (master base station or secondary base station) to reactivate or resume a cell group or cell may be performed by one of the following methods or a combination or application of the following methods.

- First method: The terminal configures a message (eg, RRC message) requesting re-activation or resumption of the secondary cell group or cell and transmits it to the master base station. In the above, when the master base station receives the message, it requests a resume procedure from the secondary base station like the first signaling procedure of FIG. 1K proposed in the present disclosure, receives a response, and instructs to reactivate or resume the secondary cell group message ( For example, an RRC message) may be configured and transmitted to the terminal. As another method, the UE constructs and transmits a message (for example, an RRC message) instructing the master eNB to activate or resume the secondary cell group again, as in the second signaling procedure of FIG. 1L, and transmits the message to the UE. can be instructed to activate or resume. As another method, the terminal may construct a message requesting re-activation or resumption of a secondary cell group or cell (eg, RRC message) and transmit it to the secondary base station through SRB3, as in the third signaling procedure of FIG. 1M. In addition, the secondary base station may configure and transmit a message (eg, an RRC message) instructing activation or resumption of the secondary cell group to the terminal, and then instruct the master base station to activate or resume.

-Second method: The terminal constructs a message (eg, MAC control information) requesting re-activation or resumption of the secondary cell group or cell and transmits it to the master base station. In the above, when the master base station receives the message, it requests a resume procedure from the secondary base station like the first signaling procedure of FIG. 1K proposed in the present disclosure, receives a response, and instructs to reactivate or resume the secondary cell group message ( For example, an RRC message or MAC control information) may be configured and transmitted to the terminal. As another method, the UE configures a message (eg, RRC message or MAC control information) instructing the master eNB to reactivate or resume the secondary cell group, and transmits it to the UE, as in the second signaling procedure of FIG. 1L. After that, activation or resumption may be instructed to the secondary base station. As another method, the terminal configures a message (eg, MAC control information) requesting re-activation or resumption of the secondary cell group or cell, and transmits it to the secondary base station through SRB3, as in the third signaling procedure of FIG. 1M. In addition, the secondary base station may configure and transmit a message (eg, an RRC message or MAC control information) instructing activation or resumption of the secondary cell group to the terminal, and then instruct the master base station to activate or resume. . When requesting or instructing cell group activation or resumption with MAC control information, the MAC control information can be newly defined and designed. A field (or indicator) may be defined or a new value (field value or identifier value) may be defined to be indicated.

-Third method: The terminal constructs a message requesting re-activation or resumption of the secondary cell group or cell (eg, a physical signal of the PHY layer device) and transmits it to the master base station. In the above, when the master base station receives the message, it requests a resume procedure from the secondary base station like the first signaling procedure of FIG. 1K proposed in the present disclosure, receives a response, and instructs to reactivate or resume the secondary cell group message ( For example, an RRC message or a physical signal of a PHY layer device) may be configured and transmitted to the terminal. As another method, the terminal configures a message (eg, an RRC message or a physical signal of a PHY layer device) instructing the master base station to reactivate or resume the secondary cell group as in the second signaling procedure of FIG. 1l. After transmitting to the terminal, the secondary base station may be instructed to activate or resume. As another method, the UE configures a message requesting re-activation or resumption of a secondary cell group or cell (for example, a physical signal of a PHY layer device) as in the third signaling procedure of FIG. The secondary base station constructs and transmits a message (for example, an RRC message or a physical signal of a PHY layer device) instructing activation or resumption of the secondary cell group to the terminal, and then activates or resumes the secondary cell group to the master base station. You can order a restart. When requesting or instructing cell group activation or resumption with a physical signal of the PHY layer device, the physical signal of the PHY layer device is a new transmission resource (eg, a new SR (scheduling request) for the secondary cell group) It can be defined and designed as a transmission resource (eg, a PUCCH transmission resource of PCell or PSCell) or a new field of DCI (transmitted from PSCell or PDCCH transmission resource transmitted from PCell) of PDCCH. In another way, Conventionally, a physical signal of a PHY layer device (eg, SR (scheduling request) transmission resource (eg, PCell or PSCell PUCCH transmission resource) or DCI field of PDCCH (transmitted from PSCell or transmitted from PCell) PDCCH transmission resource), a new field (or indicator) may be defined or a new value (field value or identifier value) may be defined and indicated. Alternatively, the terminal applies the second DRX configuration information in the above When monitoring the PDCCH for the PSCell of the secondary cell group with a long period or when the secondary cell group of the UE is in an inactive or stopped state, the PSCell triggers a random access procedure to the UE with the DCI of the PDCCH. If so, the terminal may interpret the indication as activation or resumption of the secondary cell group, wherein the physical transmission resource may mean a transmission resource for random access, and the terminal may interpret the secondary cell group as stopping or resuming the secondary cell group as described above. If uplink data for the secondary cell group is generated in a deactivated state, a random access procedure may be performed Alternatively, in the above-described state in which the secondary cell group is stopped or deactivated, uplink data for the secondary cell group is If the SR transmission resource is set (or the TA timer is running), the SR transmission resource can be transmitted to the master cell group or the secondary cell group, and if the SR transmission is not set (or the TA timer expires) case), a random access procedure may be performed. In the above, the random access procedure may perform a contention based random access (CBRA) procedure. Alternatively, if random access configuration information (dedicated RACH config or dedicated preamble) specified in the above message indicating suspension or deactivation of the cell group (or previously received message) is set (or included), CFRA (Contention Free Random Access) procedure can be performed, or the random access setting information (dedicated RACH config or dedicated preamble) specified in the above message indicating inactivation or suspension of the cell group (or previously received message) is set (or included) ), a contention based random access (CBRA) procedure may be performed. In the above, the base station may be instructed by including an indicator that uplink data has occurred during the random access procedure or after completing the random access procedure (eg, a buffer status report (MAC control element)), Upon receiving the indicator or completing the random access procedure, the base station (eg, secondary base station or master base station) transmits a message instructing the terminal to resume or activate the secondary cell group to the terminal to transmit the secondary cell group to the terminal. can be resumed or activated and data transmission or reception can be performed again.

As suggested in the present disclosure, when a UE activates or resumes a cell group (eg, secondary cell group) or cell (eg, PSCell) by an indicator of a PDCCH, MAC control information, or RRC message, the first At this point, activation or resumption of the cell group or cell may be completed. The first time point may be set as an RRC message as suggested above in the present disclosure. For example, in the RRC message, indicating when to activate or resume, deactivate or stop a dual access technology or cell group (eg, secondary cell group) or cell (PSCell or SCG SCell) Time information (eg, information indicating timing (eg, X), time unit, subframe or time slot, or symbol unit) may be included. For example, the PDCCH or MAC control information or RRC message indicating activation or resumption or inactivation or suspension of the cell group (eg, secondary cell group) or cell (eg, PSCell) is received in the n-th time unit. If so, time information for completing activation or resuming or inactivation or suspension of the cell group or cell at the n+X th may be set. Alternatively, the time information (for example, X) in the above may be used as a fixed value that is prearranged and defined, rather than set by the base station. For another example, after receiving the PDCCH or MAC control information or RRC message indicating activation or resumption or inactivation or suspension of the cell group (eg, secondary cell group) or cell (eg, PSCell) in the above n When random access starts (transmits a preamble) or random access is successfully completed in the th time unit, time information for activating or resuming or inactivating or stopping a cell group or cell in the n+X th time unit is set. It can be. Alternatively, the time information (for example, X) in the above may be used as a fixed value that is prearranged and defined, rather than set by the base station. When activating or stopping or deactivating or resuming a cell group or cell is completed, the terminal performs the terminal operation proposed in the present disclosure according to the state (eg, activation, dormancy, or inactivation) of each cell or partial bandwidth. can be done In addition, the DRX operation of the UE may be started or restarted when the activation or resumption of the cell group or cell is completed in the above, or the DRX operation of the UE may be stopped or deactivated when the inactivation or suspension of the cell group or cell is completed in the above. .

In addition, as proposed in the present disclosure, when the terminal activates a cell (eg, PSCell or SCell) of a cell group (eg, a master cell group or a secondary cell group) according to an instruction of MAC control information, a second time point Activation of the cell can be completed at . The second time point may be set as an RRC message as suggested above in the present disclosure. For example, indicating when to activate or deactivate a frequency aggregation technology or dual access technology or a cell group (eg, a master cell group or a secondary cell group) or a cell (MCG SCell or SCG SCell) in the RRC message Time information (eg, information indicating timing (eg, X), time unit, subframe or time slot, or symbol unit) may be included. For example, if MAC control information indicating activation or deactivation of a cell (eg, SCell) is received in the n-th time unit, the time information for completing activation or deactivation of the cell in the n+X-th unit is can be set. As another method, the time information (eg, X) may be used as a fixed value that is prearranged and defined, rather than set by the base station. As another example, after receiving the MAC control information indicating activation or deactivation of the cell (eg, SCell or PSCell) in the above, random access is started (transmitting a preamble) at the nth time unit, or When access is successfully completed, time information for completing activation or deactivation of the cell at n+X may be set. Alternatively, the time information (eg, X) in the above may be used as a fixed value that is prearranged and defined, rather than set by the base station. When activating or stopping or deactivating or resuming a cell group or cell is completed, the terminal performs the terminal operation proposed in the present disclosure according to the state (eg, activation, dormancy, or inactivation) of each cell or partial bandwidth. can be done In addition, the DRX operation of the UE may be started or restarted when the activation or resumption of the cell group or cell is completed in the above, or the DRX operation of the UE may be stopped or deactivated when the inactivation or suspension of the cell group or cell is completed in the above. .

In addition, as suggested in the present disclosure, when the terminal activates a cell (eg, PSCell or SCell) of a cell group (eg, a master cell group or a secondary cell group) according to an RRC message indication, a third time point Activation of the cell can be completed at . The third time point may be set as an RRC message as suggested above in the present disclosure. For example, when to activate or deactivate frequency aggregation technology or dual access technology or cell group (eg, master cell group or secondary cell group) or cell (MCG SCell or SCG SCell or PSCell) in the RRC message. Time information (eg, information indicating timing (eg, X), time unit, subframe or time slot, or symbol unit) indicating the time may be included. For example, if an RRC message indicating activation or deactivation of a cell (eg, SCell) is received in the n-th time unit, time information for completing activation or deactivation of the cell is set in the n+X-th time unit. It can be. Alternatively, the time information (eg, X) in the above may be used as a fixed value that is prearranged and defined, rather than set by the base station. As another example, after receiving the RRC message instructing activation or deactivation of the cell (eg, SCell or PSCell), start random access (transmit a preamble) or random access at the nth time unit. When it is successfully completed, time information for completing activation or deactivation of the cell at the n+X th may be set. As another method, the time information (eg, X) may be used as a fixed value that is prearranged and defined, rather than set by the base station. In the above, X may be set or reserved based on a slot number or based on the shortest slon length among set PCells, PSCells, or SCells. When activating or stopping or deactivating or resuming a cell group or cell is completed, the terminal performs the terminal operation proposed in the present disclosure according to the state (eg, activation, dormancy, or inactivation) of each cell or partial bandwidth. can be done In addition, the DRX operation of the UE may be started or restarted when the activation or resumption of the cell group or cell is completed in the above, or the DRX operation of the UE may be stopped or deactivated when the inactivation or suspension of the cell group or cell is completed in the above. .

Meanwhile, the concept of a cell group proposed in the present disclosure may be extended to a sub-cell group. For example, in the present disclosure, in order to set the dual access technology to the terminal, the first cell group and the second cell group are set, and the dual access technology is set and data transmitted by applying it to the master cell group and the secondary cell group Alternatively, reception can be performed with two base stations. However, if the concept of the cell group is extended to a sub-cell group, a plurality of sub-cell groups may be set in the cell group to a terminal connected to one base station, or a sub-cell group identifier may be set in each sub-cell group. In addition, the terminal performs data transmission or reception for one base station, but activates or stops or resumes or deactivates procedures by PDCCH or MAC control information or RRC message proposed in the present disclosure for different frequencies or cells for each subcell group. It can be extended and applied. For example, when a terminal communicates with one base station and a plurality of frequencies or cells, the base station provides the terminal with a plurality of sub frequencies or cells of the base station corresponding to the cell group (master cell group). Cell groups can be configured to set the terminal to apply carrier aggregation, and fields indicating each of the sub-cell groups are defined in PDCCH, MAC control information, or an RRC message so that each field corresponds to each sub-cell group. It can be instructed to activate or deactivate or stop or resume. In addition, the terminal may apply an activation or suspension or resume or deactivation procedure to different frequencies or cells for each subcell group by using the PDCCH or MAC control information or RRC message proposed in this disclosure. Alternatively, the sub-cell group proposed above may be implemented by introducing a downlink or uplink logical channel restriction for each cell. For example, the terminal may be set by including configuration information for limiting data transmission or reception of logical channels belonging to one cell group to a specific frequency or cell in an RRC message. As described above, by mapping and configuring logical channels (eg, logical channel identifiers) to each cell or frequency, the logical channels are grouped and regarded as the sub-cell group proposed above, PDCCH fields indicating each of the cells Alternatively, it may be defined in the MAC control information or the RRC message so that each field indicates activation or deactivation or suspension or resumption of each cell.

In addition, in the present disclosure, when a terminal configured with dual access technology receives data transmission or reception with a master cell group or a secondary cell group, or when a secondary cell group is suspended or deactivated, if a radio connection failure is detected in the master cell group, the terminal may report the radio connection failure to the secondary cell group or to the master cell group through the secondary cell group. For example, an RRC message for reporting a radio connection failure may be configured and transmitted through split SRB1 or SRB3 to be reported. In the case where split SRB1 is configured above, the radio connection failure may be reported through split SRB1 at all times. As another method, when the terminal for which the dual access technology is set receives data transmission or reception with the master cell group or the secondary cell group, or when the secondary cell group is stopped or deactivated, if the master cell group detects a radio connection failure If so, the terminal may declare radio link failure and perform an RRC Connection Re-establishment procedure.

In addition, in the present disclosure, when a terminal configured with dual access technology receives data transmission or reception with a master cell group or a secondary cell group, or when the secondary cell group is suspended or deactivated, if a radio connection failure is detected in the secondary cell group, the terminal The radio connection failure may be reported to the master cell group or to the secondary cell group through the master cell group. For example, an RRC message for reporting a radio connection failure may be configured and transmitted through SRB1 or split SRB1 or SRB3 to be reported. When SRB1 or split SRB1 is configured above, the radio connection failure may be reported as split SRB1 at all times.

In the present disclosure, releasing the secondary cell group when the dual access technology is configured for the UE means releasing the connection (data transmission or reception) with the secondary cell group or configuration information (or bearer configuration information or protocol) of the secondary cell group. It means discarding or releasing the layer device configuration information (PHY or MAC or RLC or PDCP or SDAP layer device), while stopping or disabling the secondary cell group in the above means connection with the secondary cell group (data transmission or reception) is released or stopped, but the configuration information (or bearer configuration information or protocol layer device configuration information (PHY or MAC or RLC or PDCP or SDAP layer device)) of the secondary cell group is maintained, stopped, or stored or recalled later. This means that a connection with the secondary cell group can be quickly resumed or activated based on the stored configuration information of the secondary cell group.

Hereinafter, when a frequency measurement procedure or a frequency measurement report procedure is set to the UE with the RRC message (eg, RRCReconfiguration) of the present disclosure, or when a dual access technology is set in the UE, or the frequency measurement procedure or the frequency measurement report procedure When is set for a cell group (or SCG), the UE proposes to prioritize SRB3 and report the frequency measurement result through SRB3, and reports the frequency measurement result through SRB1 (or SRB of MCG) only when SRB3 is not set. Suggest to report However, it is suggested that the UE does not perform measurement reporting through SRB3 when the cell group (SCG) is inactivated. For example, if SRB3 is set only when the cell group is not deactivated, the UE proposes a procedure for reporting the frequency measurement result through SRB3, or if the cell group is deactivated, SRB1 (or SRB of MCG) We propose a procedure for reporting frequency measurement results through This is because if the cell group (SCG) is deactivated and the frequency measurement result is transmitted to SRB3, the cell group must be activated unnecessarily. The detailed procedure of the terminal is as follows.

- 1> If a frequency measurement procedure or a frequency measurement reporting procedure is set in the terminal

■ 2> If the terminal is set to (NG) EN-DC (or if the frequency measurement procedure or frequency measurement reporting procedure is set for a cell group (or SCG)),

◆ 3> If SRB3 is configured in the UE and the state of the cell group (SCG) is not set to an inactive state

● 4> The UE transfers the frequency measurement result report message to the lower layer device for transmission through SRB3.

◆ 3> otherwise

● 4> The UE transfers the frequency measurement result report message to the lower layer device for transmission through SRB1 (or SRB of MCG (E-UTRA)).

■ 2> If the terminal is set to NR-DC or if the frequency measurement procedure or frequency measurement reporting procedure is configured for a cell group (or SCG),

◆ 3> If SRB3 is configured in the UE and the state of the cell group (SCG) is not set to an inactive state

● 4> The UE transfers the frequency measurement result report message to the lower layer device for transmission through SRB3.

◆ 3> otherwise

● 4> The UE transfers the frequency measurement result report message to the lower layer device for transmission through SRB1 (or SRB of MCG (E-UTRA)).

1n is a diagram illustrating an operation of a terminal proposed in the present disclosure.

In FIG. 1n, the terminal 1n-01 may receive a message (eg, DCI or MAC control information of PDCCH or RRC message) from the base station (1n-05). If the cell group configuration information, cell group status, or cell group indicator is included in the message, the terminal determines whether the cell group is set, added, activated, or restarted, or whether the cell group is released, deactivated, or stopped. It can be checked (1n-10). If setting or adding or activating or resuming a cell group is instructed in the above, the procedure for setting or adding or activating or resuming a cell group suggested in the present disclosure may be performed (1n-20). If inactivation or suspension is instructed, the cell group release, inactivation, or suspension procedure proposed in the present disclosure may be performed (1n-30).

1O is a diagram showing the structure of a terminal to which an embodiment of the present disclosure can be applied.

Referring to the drawing, the terminal includes a radio frequency (RF) processing unit 1o-10, a baseband processing unit 1o-20, a storage unit 1o-30, and a control unit 1o-40. do.

The RF processor 1o-10 performs functions for transmitting and receiving signals through a wireless channel, such as band conversion and amplification of signals. That is, the RF processing unit 1o-10 up-converts the baseband signal provided from the baseband processing unit 1o-20 into an RF band signal, transmits the signal through an antenna, and transmits the RF band signal received through the antenna. down-convert to a baseband signal. For example, the RF processor 1o-10 may include a transmit filter, a receive filter, an amplifier, a mixer, an oscillator, a digital to analog converter (DAC), an analog to digital converter (ADC), and the like. can In the figure, only one antenna is shown, but the terminal may include multiple antennas. Also, the RF processor 1o-10 may include a plurality of RF chains. Furthermore, the RF processor 1o-10 may perform beamforming. For the beamforming, the RF processor 1o-10 may adjust the phase and magnitude of signals transmitted and received through a plurality of antennas or antenna elements. Also, the RF processing unit may perform MIMO, and may receive multiple layers when performing the MIMO operation. The RF processing unit 1o-10 may appropriately set a plurality of antennas or antenna elements under the control of the control unit to perform reception beam sweeping, or adjust the direction and beam width of the reception beam so that the reception beam is coordinated with the transmission beam. there is.

The baseband processor 1o-20 performs a conversion function between a baseband signal and a bit string according to the physical layer standard of the system. For example, during data transmission, the baseband processor 1o-20 generates complex symbols by encoding and modulating a transmission bit stream. Also, when data is received, the baseband processor 1o-20 demodulates and decodes the baseband signal provided from the RF processor 1o-10 to restore a received bit string. For example, in the case of orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM), during data transmission, the baseband processor 1o-20 encodes and modulates a transmission bit stream to generate complex symbols, and transmits the complex symbols to subcarriers. After mapping to, OFDM symbols are configured through inverse fast Fourier transform (IFFT) operation and cyclic prefix (CP) insertion. In addition, when data is received, the baseband processing unit 1o-20 divides the baseband signal provided from the RF processing unit 1o-10 into OFDM symbol units, and performs a fast Fourier transform (FFT) operation on subcarriers. After restoring the mapped signals, a received bit stream is restored through demodulation and decoding.

The baseband processing unit 1o-20 and the RF processing unit 1o-10 transmit and receive signals as described above. Accordingly, the baseband processing unit 1o-20 and the RF processing unit 1o-10 may be referred to as a transmitter, a receiver, a transceiver, or a communication unit. Furthermore, at least one of the baseband processing unit 1o-20 and the RF processing unit 1o-10 may include a plurality of communication modules to support a plurality of different wireless access technologies. In addition, at least one of the baseband processor 1o-20 and the RF processor 1o-10 may include different communication modules to process signals of different frequency bands. For example, the different radio access technologies may include an LTE network, a NR network, and the like. In addition, the different frequency bands may include a super high frequency (SHF) (eg, 2.5 GHz, 5 Ghz) band and a millimeter wave (eg, 60 GHz) band.

The storage unit 1o-30 stores data such as a basic program for operation of the terminal, an application program, and setting information. The storage unit 1o-30 provides stored data according to the request of the control unit 1o-40.

The controller 1o-40 controls overall operations of the terminal. For example, the controller 1o-40 transmits and receives signals through the baseband processor 1o-20 and the RF processor 1o-10. In addition, the control unit 1o-40 writes and reads data in the storage unit 1o-40. To this end, the controller 1o-40 may include at least one processor. For example, the control unit 1o-40 may include a communication processor (CP) that controls communication and an application processor (AP) that controls upper layers such as application programs.

1p is a diagram illustrating the structure of a base station (or transmission reception point (TRP)) to which an embodiment of the present disclosure may be applied.

As shown in the figure, the base station includes an RF processing unit 1p-10, a baseband processing unit 1p-20, a backhaul communication unit 1p-30, a storage unit 1p-40, and a control unit 1p-50. It is composed of.

The RF processing unit 1p-10 performs functions for transmitting and receiving signals through a wireless channel, such as band conversion and amplification of signals. That is, the RF processing unit 1p-10 upconverts the baseband signal provided from the baseband processing unit 1p-20 into an RF band signal, transmits the signal through an antenna, and transmits the RF band signal received through the antenna. Downconverts to a baseband signal. For example, the RF processor 1p-10 may include a transmit filter, a receive filter, an amplifier, a mixer, an oscillator, a DAC, an ADC, and the like. In the figure, only one antenna is shown, but the first access node may include multiple antennas. Also, the RF processor 1p-10 may include a plurality of RF chains. Furthermore, the RF processor 1p-10 may perform beamforming. For the beamforming, the RF processor 1p-10 may adjust the phase and size of signals transmitted and received through a plurality of antennas or antenna elements. The RF processing unit may perform a downlink MIMO operation by transmitting one or more layers.

The baseband processor 1p-20 performs a conversion function between a baseband signal and a bit stream according to the physical layer standard of the first wireless access technology. For example, during data transmission, the baseband processor 1p-20 generates complex symbols by encoding and modulating a transmission bit stream. Also, upon receiving data, the baseband processor 1p-20 demodulates and decodes the baseband signal provided from the RF processor 1p-10 to restore a received bit stream. For example, according to the OFDM scheme, when data is transmitted, the baseband processing unit 1p-20 generates complex symbols by encoding and modulating a transmission bit stream, maps the complex symbols to subcarriers, and then performs IFFT OFDM symbols are constructed through operation and CP insertion. In addition, when receiving data, the baseband processing unit 1p-20 divides the baseband signal provided from the RF processing unit 1p-10 into OFDM symbol units and restores signals mapped to subcarriers through FFT operation. After that, the received bit string is restored through demodulation and decoding. The baseband processing unit 1p-20 and the RF processing unit 1p-10 transmit and receive signals as described above. Accordingly, the baseband processing unit 1p-20 and the RF processing unit 1p-10 may be referred to as a transmission unit, a reception unit, a transmission/reception unit, a communication unit, or a wireless communication unit.

The communication unit 1p-30 provides an interface for communicating with other nodes in the network.

The storage unit 1p-40 stores data such as a basic program for the operation of the main base station, an application program, and setting information. In particular, the storage unit 1p-40 may store information about a bearer assigned to a connected terminal, measurement results reported from the connected terminal, and the like. In addition, the storage unit 1p-40 may store information that is a criterion for determining whether to provide or stop multiple connections to the terminal. Also, the storage unit 1p-40 provides the stored data according to the request of the control unit 1p-50.

The controller 1p-50 controls overall operations of the main base station. For example, the control unit 1p-50 transmits and receives signals through the baseband processing unit 1p-20 and the RF processing unit 1p-10 or through the backhaul communication unit 1p-30. Also, the control unit 1p-50 writes and reads data in the storage unit 1p-40. To this end, the controller 1p-50 may include at least one processor.

The methods proposed in the present disclosure may be executed by combining some or all of the contents included in each embodiment within the scope of not spoiling the essence of the present disclosure.

On the other hand, the embodiments of the present disclosure disclosed in the present specification and drawings are only presented as specific examples to easily explain the technical content of the present disclosure and help understanding of the present disclosure, and are not intended to limit the scope of the present disclosure. That is, it is obvious to those skilled in the art that other modified examples based on the technical idea of the present disclosure can be implemented.

In addition, the present specification and drawings disclose preferred embodiments of the present disclosure, and although specific terms are used, they are only used in a general sense to easily describe the technical content of the present disclosure and help understanding of the present invention. It is not intended to limit the scope of the disclosure. In addition to the embodiments disclosed herein, it is obvious to those skilled in the art that other modified examples based on the technical spirit of the present disclosure may be implemented.

Claims (1)

A control signal processing method in a wireless communication system,
Receiving a first control signal transmitted from a base station;
processing the received first control signal; and
and transmitting a second control signal generated based on the processing to the base station.

Images